JP2017070795A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine reliably enabling a visual recognizing or photographing of a rare presentation to be performed in a display device.SOLUTION: If an image saving button 23 is operated by a player, a presentation (premium presentation) which was displayed in a third symbol display device 81 is reproduced and displayed between a third round and a seventh round in a big win (jackpot). While the presentation is being reproduced during the rounds in the big win, if the image saving button 23 is operated by the player again, the presentation that is being reproduced is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by operating the image saving button 23 while the premium presentation is being reproduced in the big win, the player can stop and display an image, in the premium presentation, which is desired to be visually recognized or photographed by a cellular phone terminal. Consequently, the image stopped and displayed can be reliably visually recognized or photographed by the cellular phone terminal.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

  Conventionally, identification information (for example, a symbol) is dynamically displayed on a screen of a display device having a liquid crystal screen or the like, and when the dynamic display is stopped, the identification information has a predetermined combination (for example, “7”). There are known gaming machines (such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) that shift to a special gaming state (for example, jackpot) that gives an advantageous gaming value to a player when the symbols are stopped in a line.

  The player expects that the dynamic display of the identification information that is normally performed stops and displays a special game state with a combination of the predetermined identification information, so that the game is performed while paying attention to the dynamic display of the identification information. I do. However, since the transition to the special game state is extremely small with respect to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed, the game is repeated many times if there is no variation in the dynamic display of the identification information during normal times. The player gets bored with the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, a player who has played a game many times is less likely to pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification information, resulting in a problem that the gameability is reduced.

Therefore, in recent gaming machines, at the start of dynamic display of identification information, a rare suggestion effect (such as a premier effect) that gives the expectation of the transition to a special game state thereafter, or dynamic display of identification information In the middle of the game, a rare performance different from normal is performed, and it is performed that the player gets bored with the dynamic display of the identification information and the game performance is reduced (see Patent Document 1). ).
In addition, if there is no variation in the production during the special gaming state, a player who has played the game many times can have expectation for the addition of game value, but the production for the special gaming state You can't have a sense of expectation. As a result, gazing at the effects in the special gaming state is reduced, and the gameability in the special gaming state is reduced. Accordingly, there is a gaming machine that performs rare effects during a special gaming state according to the number of consecutive consecutive special gaming states (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots including probability changes and time savings).

JP 2000-342784 A

  As described above, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a rare effect at the start or during the dynamic display of identification information, so that the player gets bored with the dynamic display of identification information. However, since the display mode of the identification information dynamically changes as the dynamic display progresses, the rare display displayed to suppress the decrease in game play There was a case that I missed. Similarly, since the display mode of the effects in the special game state changes from time to time, even if rare effects are performed, the rare effects may be missed.

  In recent years, a mobile phone terminal has been provided with a photo function, and it is often performed to take a rare effect using the photo function and then show the taken effect to an acquaintance. However, the dynamic display of the identification information and the special gaming state effect change as the display progresses as needed, so even if a rare effect is performed, it is rare while preparing a mobile phone terminal. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to leave as a photograph.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reliably viewing or photographing a rare effect performed on a display device.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control unit that performs main control of a game, and a display device that displays a plurality of effects based on instructions of the main control unit, As one of the effects, dynamic display of identification information is performed on the display device. The operation means operated by the player and the operation means are operated while the effect is being performed on the display device. Then, when the operation means is operated based on the effect storage means for storing the effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device and the effect information stored in the effect storage means, Reproduction means for reproducing and displaying the effect displayed on the display device during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information is provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the operation means is operated in the effect storage means while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. The effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information in the case is stored.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit, an effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed. If the operation means is operated while the operation means is being operated, a stop means for stopping and displaying the reproduced display is provided.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, the elapsed time of the reproduction being reproduced that has been stopped and displayed is displayed. As a reference, there are provided adjusting means for moving the elapsed time back and forth, and front and back stop display means for causing the display device to stop-display an effect corresponding to the elapsed time changed by the adjusting means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein when the operation unit is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, the stop is performed. A resuming unit is provided that causes the reproduction unit to resume the reproduction of the effect from the displayed time point.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the operating means is operated by the player while the effect is being performed on the display device, the effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device is displayed. The effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced by the reproduction means during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information based on the stored effect information stored in the storage means. Is displayed. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed on the display device, the player can operate the operation means to display the rare effect later, so that the player can surely see the rare effect. There is an effect that it is possible to shoot with certainty because there is room for preparing a mobile phone terminal.

  Also, here, if the effect displayed on the display device when the player operates the operating means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the reproduced effect is It is unclear whether it is an effect for the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, since the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means at the time of the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the reliability of the dynamic display of the identification information from being lowered.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operating means is operated by the player while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. And the effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is stored in the effect storage means, so that the effect displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information is an effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information. Sometimes it can be reproduced and displayed by reproduction means. Therefore, since the player can operate the operation means, the dynamic display effect of the identification information when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player operates the operation means, and the rare effect is displayed later. There is an effect that the production can be surely visually recognized, and there is a room for preparing a mobile phone terminal, so that it can be surely photographed.

  Further, here, if the effect of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the other identification information, the dynamic information of the current identification information is displayed. It is unclear whether it is an effect on display or an effect of dynamic display of identification information when the player operates the operating means. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine of claim 2, since the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means at the time other than the dynamic display of the identification information, Whether the presentation of the dynamic display of the identification information is the production for the dynamic display of the identification information this time or the presentation of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means, There is an effect that the reliability of the dynamic display of the identification information can be prevented from being lowered.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated by the reproducing means is reproduced. If the operating means is operated while it is being displayed, the reproduced display is stopped and displayed by the stopping means. Therefore, the player can operate the operation means while the effect is being reproduced by the reproduction means, so that the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, or can be viewed or photographed with the mobile phone terminal. Accordingly, among the effects that are reproduced, the display mode desired by the player to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal can be stopped and displayed, so the display mode desired by the player can be viewed or shot with the mobile phone terminal. There is an effect of providing possible playability.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 3, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stopping unit, the elapsed time of the effect displayed by the stop display The elapsed time based on the above is changed by the adjusting means, and an effect corresponding to the elapsed time changed before and after is displayed on the display device by the front and rear display means. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means to stop and display the effect that is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means, for example, the player's operation is delayed so that the player can view or take a picture with the mobile phone terminal. Even if the desired display is not stopped, it is possible to adjust the display to be stopped by adjusting the elapsed time by the adjusting means, so that the player can visually check the desired display or can take a picture with a mobile phone terminal. There is an effect that it can be provided.
According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 3 or 4, when the operation means is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped by the stop means Then, the reproduction means restarts the reproduction of the effect from the display at the time of the stop display by the resuming means, so that a plurality of indications that the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal are reproduced in one. Even in some cases, the player can stop and display a plurality of desired effects by operating the operation means a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gameability in which a plurality of displays desired by the player can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual screen and effective line setting in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the symbol change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot presentation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which shows the change of the production | presentation of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, and the change of a state. It is the flowchart which showed the change production process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration screen effect process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button input monitoring and presentation process performed with MPU of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot presentation process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in jackpot presentation. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the change production process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot presentation process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17.

  The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 and an image storage button 23 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  Further, the image save button 23 provides an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (such as a premium effect displayed during symbol variation display (dynamic display of identification information) or jackpot (special game state)). When saving, when the saved effect is reproduced and displayed, and when the effect (image) is stopped and displayed, the player is operated when the stopped and displayed effect is restarted and displayed. . When the image save button 23 is operated and the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is saved, the saved effect is reproduced and displayed during a subsequent big hit round. When the image save button 23 is operated while the saved effect is being reproduced, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed when the image save button 23 is operated again. The effect is resumed and displayed. That is, the premier effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is reproduced and displayed during the big hit round, and the reproduced premier effect etc. can be stopped and displayed on the way, so that the player can afford You can see the premiere effect and you can shoot the premier effect on your mobile phone.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the lending operation unit 40 is operated with a bill or a card inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, lending of balls according to the operation Is done.

  Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance.

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14 c of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Furthermore, during the probability change in this embodiment, the game is in a state where the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running, it means a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). . In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per time are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. For example, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The symbol “○” and “x” in FIG. 1 are alternately lit to display a variation, and the variation display is stopped when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “◯”). The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it carry out using a part of. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (detection means, a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4)) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the turning on of the 1 entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. Can be visually recognized through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. A round counter 203 a is provided in the work area of the RAM 203. This round counter 203a is a counter that stores the number of rounds (1 to 16 in this embodiment) that is a big hit, and a value 1 is added every time the round advances in the big hit processing of FIG. 13 (S708), A value 0 (initial value) is set at the end of the jackpot (S712).

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 8), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a holding lamp 84, and various switches including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown). 208, a solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid is excited, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the image storage lamp 23a), The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 performed by the display control apparatus 114 is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 223 is provided with a fluctuation start flag 223a and an image storage lamp lighting flag 223b. The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag for determining whether or not to start the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2208 in FIG. 17). When the setting of the display mode of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is started, the display is turned off (see S2303 in FIG. 18). The image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is a flag for determining whether or not to turn on the image storage lamp 23a, and is turned on when an image storage lamp lighting command is received from the display control device 114 (see S2208 in FIG. 17). When the image storage lamp turn-off command is received from the display control device 114, it is turned off (see S2209 in FIG. 17).

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When a command determination process (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, is executed, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, the first stored command is read, and the read command is analyzed. The process according to the command is performed.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226 that outputs sound from a speaker (not shown), and a lamp display device 227 that performs lamp display using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. In addition, a frame button 22, an image save button 23, an image save lamp 23a, and the like are connected to each other.

  The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and includes a variable time counter (not shown).

  Here, the variation time counter (not shown) is a counter that measures the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) since the variation effect was started when the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This variation time counter is reset to zero immediately before the variation effect is started in the variation effect process (see FIG. 22) executed every 20 milliseconds (see S1404 in FIG. 23), and the third symbol display device 81. While the changing effect is being performed, it is updated by adding 1 each time the changing effect process is executed (see S3208 in FIG. 22). That is, the variation time counter counts 20 milliseconds as one count. In the variation effect process, variation effect data or continuous notice effect data corresponding to the value of the variation time counter is read from the video RAM 234 described later, and an image corresponding to the effect data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the work RAM 233 includes a production permission flag 233a, a change start flag 233b, a demonstration execution flag 233c, a symbol stop flag 233d, a round counter 233e, a big hit middle flag 233f, an image storage counter 233g, an image storage area 233h, an effective flag 233i, and A reproduction stop flag 233j is provided.

  The effect permission flag 233a is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of various effects performed in the third symbol display device 81 is permitted, and an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is an audio lamp. When it is received via the control device 113, it is turned on (see S3009 in FIG. 20), and the on state is continued until the power is shut off.

  The variation start flag 233b is turned on when a variation pattern command for display instructing a variation effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 or a mode of continuous notice effect is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3010 in FIG. 20). ), It is turned off when the variable display is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see S3203 in FIG. 22).

  The demonstration execution flag 233c is a flag for determining whether or not to perform a customer waiting effect (standby effect, hereinafter referred to as “demonstration effect”) in the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81. Is turned on when a demonstration execution command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received when the variation effect performed in step S3 is not performed for a predetermined time or longer (see S3019 in FIG. 20), and is turned off when the variation effect is resumed. (See S3012 in FIG. 20).

  The symbol stop flag 233d is a flag indicating whether or not to stop the variable display of the symbol sequence performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a stop command transmitted from the main control device 110 is sent via the voice lamp control device 113. Turned on (see S3014 in FIG. 20) and turned off when all symbols are stopped (see S3213 in FIG. 22).

  The round counter 233e is a counter that stores the number of rounds of the jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, and when the round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a value corresponding to the round number extracted from the round number command is stored (see S3015 in FIG. 20). Specifically, if round 1, value 1 is stored, and if round 16, value 16 is stored.

  The big hit flag 233f is a flag indicating whether or not the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit effect, and a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is sent via the voice lamp control device 113. Turned on (see S3016 in FIG. 20), and turned off when a jackpot end command transmitted from the main control device 113 is received via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S3017 in FIG. 20).

  The image storage counter 233g is a counter indicating the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h. Each time the image storage command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 and the reproduction data is stored in the image storage area 233h. 1 is added (S3024 in FIG. 20), and the initial value (value 0) is stored when the jackpot end command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received via the sound lamp controller 113 (S3018 in FIG. 20). reference).

  The image storage area 233h is an area for storing reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the image storage button 23 is operated by the player. An upper limit is set for the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (in the present embodiment, the upper limit is 5). Therefore, the third symbol display when the player operates the image saving button 23 when the image saving command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of reproduction data stored in the image saving area 233h is less than five. Reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display performed by the device 81 is stored (see S3023 in FIG. 20). If the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is 5 or more, the oldest reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is deleted, and the player of this time presses the image storage button 23. The reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 when operated is newly stored (see S3025 in FIG. 20).

  The valid flag 233i is a flag indicating whether or not the operation of the image saving button 23 is valid. In the present embodiment, a period for validating the operation of the image saving button 23 is determined, and during the valid period, a variable display is performed when the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit. And during reproduction of effects based on reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h in the big hit round. Therefore, when the variable display that is a big hit is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see S3206 in FIG. 22), the reproduction of the effect based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h in the big hit round is performed. Turned on when started (see S3306 in FIG. 23), and when a variable display that is not a big hit is started (see S3207 in FIG. 22), or when a normal presentation is performed in the big hit round (S3303 in FIG. 23) Turned off.

  The reproduction stop flag 233j reproduces the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the image save button 23 is operated by the player based on the reproduction data stored in the image save area 233h. In the meantime, it is a flag for determining whether or not the reproduced effect is to be stopped and whether to reproduce the effect from the stopped display state. Specifically, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is on, the effect that has been reproduced is stopped and displayed, and if the reproduction stop flag 233j is off, the effect that was stopped and displayed is resumed. The reproduction stop flag 233j receives an image saving command corresponding to the image saving button 23 from the sound lamp control device 113, and the image saving button 23 is valid (the effect is reproduced based on the reproduction data during the big hit). On and off are alternately switched (S3027, S3028 in FIG. 20) and turned off at the end of the jackpot (see S3017 in FIG. 20).

  The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data (character information) such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format.

  The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing data for variation effect after decompression (hereinafter referred to as “variation effect data”) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, the video RAM 234 stores the contents of the variation effect data in correspondence with the elapsed time from the start to the end of the variation. As a result, it is possible to extract the variation effect data corresponding to the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) since the variation effect was started.

  The video RAM 234 is provided with a variable effect area (not shown). This region for variation effect (not shown) is a region for storing variation effect data of the variation effect (variation display) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 responds to the variation elapsed time from the variation effect data in the mode indicated in the display variation pattern command stored in the video RAM 234 in advance. The changed effect data is read out and stored in this changed effect area (see S3210 in FIG. 22). The variable effect data stored in the variable effect area is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (see S3211 in FIG. 22). And the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the area | region for fluctuation | variation effect according to fluctuation | variation elapsed time. The video RAM 234 is further provided with a jackpot effect area and a demonstration effect area. In the jackpot effect area and the demonstration effect area, the display contents of the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect are changed by rewriting the contents according to the elapsed time, similarly to the variable effect area.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14), store the information on the occurrence of power interruption in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 8), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Here, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) is executed. And updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit, and in this embodiment, one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, After reaching 4), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the jackpot is “0, 4”, and two types of hits are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The high probability state refers to a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) means a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is based on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reservations), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected so that a jackpot is likely to occur and a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240 and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs.

  Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. .

  As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8).

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting in the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment, The design of the shell). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols corresponding to the odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the jackpot, the variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are scrolled (rightwardly scrolled) from right to left (arrow X direction) with a periodicity for each symbol row. Is displayed in a variable manner.

  In such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has three columns of left / middle / right or upper / middle / lower for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Three symbols are displayed. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in any case during horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  In each game, when the variable display that scrolls horizontally is stopped, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is arranged on any active line, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot. . At this time, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, in this embodiment, a reach effect is performed as one of the effects of the variable display performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The reach effect is an effect in which two of the same symbols are stopped on one of the lines L1 to L5 (in this embodiment, one line or two lines), and one symbol is unconfirmed (being changed). is there. In addition, for reach production, normal reach with low expectation to jackpot (the probability of being selected when transitioning to jackpot is low), super reach with high expectation for jackpot than the normal reach, and end of variable display of symbols There will be a premier reach that will always be a big hit. FIG. 6B is a reach effect in a state in which the same symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed on the lines L4 and L5, and “Swimsuit Man” is illustrated at the center. In the present embodiment, the effect that the man in the swimsuit appears is one of the premier reach.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 7 to 14. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

  First, referring to FIG. 7, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side and the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 11) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of acquired balls to the payout control device 111 A prize ball command corresponding to is sent. Further, by this external output processing (S201), a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, etc. required for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol display device 81). Morphological information indicating the form of the variable display) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, or when a ball is fired, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the jackpot processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14) has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 8).

  As shown in FIG. 9, in this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the number of the operation holding balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation holding ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first hit type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In this embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is reached after a big hit, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is reached, and a blue LED is turned on when it is out of place. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 9). In this variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401).

  Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “7,307” is a winning value among the values 0 to 699 of the first random number counter C1 when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is normal low probability, and “28, “63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618” are hit values.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ).

  In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to a high probability state after big hit (whether it is a probable big hit) or to shift to a low probability state (whether it is a normal big hit) is set. The When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the transition state after the jackpot.

  That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to a low probability state (normally big hit), and when “0, 4”, , Move to a high probability state (probability big hit).

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. .

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S403, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  After the process of S403 or S405, a variation pattern command is set (S406). In the process of S406, the fluctuation pattern command at the time of jackpot is the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined in the process of S403 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, the normal jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. Or)). In the process of S406, the fluctuation pattern command at the time of deviation is the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined in the process of S405 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (that is, the front / rear deviation reach or other than the front / rear deviation) It is set according to whether it is reach or completely off.

  After the process of S406, a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404 (S407), and then the process returns to the variation process.

  These variation pattern command and stop symbol command are stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are converted into voice lamps in the process of S201 of the main process (see FIG. 8). It is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process (see FIG. 12) associated with winning in the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), a firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor and turns on / off the launch of the ball on the condition that the launch stop switch for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining OFF. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 11).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance pass counter 203b (S602).

  After the process of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number N of activated balls is <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of activated balls is incremented by 1 (S604), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605).

  On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number N of operation reservation balls is not less than 4 (S603: No). , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the jackpot processing (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 8).

  When this jackpot processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S701). If the current jackpot is not being hit (S701: No), the jackpot processing (S205) is terminated as it is. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the present is a big hit (S701: Yes), it is necessary to open and close the specific winning opening 65a. For this reason, when the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S702: Yes) and the specific winning opening 65a is open (S703: Yes), the large winning opening opening solenoid provided in the variable winning apparatus 65 is provided. Is turned on to open the specific winning opening 65a (S704). The opening time of the specific prize opening 65a means that the value of the round counter 203a is “1” or more and that a fixed time has passed since the variable display with the jackpot symbol is confirmed and stopped, or the previous special prize opening 65a This is the time when any one of the conditions that a certain time has passed since closing. On the other hand, when the specific winning opening 65a is being opened (S702: No), or even when the specific winning opening 65a is closed, it is not the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S703: No), the process of S704 is performed. The process skips to S705.

  In the process of S705, a round number command corresponding to the number of rounds stored in the round counter 203a is set (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. The process of S705 is a process of setting a command for informing the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 of what round the jackpot is now. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player in a state where the variation display of the symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect of the variation display of the symbol is reproduced. The reproduction data to be stored is stored in the image storage area 233h. And the reproduction of the presentation based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233a is configured to be able to be displayed between 3 rounds to 7 rounds. Therefore, a round number command indicating the number of rounds that is a big hit is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S706, it is determined whether or not it is the closing time of the specific winning opening 65a (S706). The closing timing of the specific prize opening 65a is a time when a certain time elapses after the specific prize opening 65a is opened or 10 balls are awarded to the specific prize opening 65a. If it is the closing time of the specific winning opening 65a (S706: Yes), the large winning opening releasing solenoid is turned off (S707), 1 is added to the round counter 203a (S708), and the big hit processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the processing of S706 that it is not the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S706: No), it is determined whether the value of the round counter 203a is “15” or less (S709), and “15” or less. If there is (S706: Yes), it is not the last round of jackpot (that is, round 16), so the jackpot processing (S205) is terminated as it is. Also, if the value of the round counter 203a is greater than “15” in the processing of S709 (S709: No), it will be the 16th round, and the closing of the last specific winning opening 65a will be over and the jackpot end effect will be executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the execution time of the end effect has passed (S710).

  In the process of S710, if the execution time of the end effect has not elapsed (S710: No), the jackpot process (S205) is ended as it is, and if the execution time of the end effect has elapsed (S710: Yes), the jackpot Therefore, the jackpot end command is set (S711), the value of the round counter 203a is set to “0 (initial value)”, and the jackpot processing (S205) is ended. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player in a state where the symbol variation display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display effect of the symbol is displayed. Reproduction data for reproducing the image is stored in the image storage area 233h, and the reproduction of the production based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h can be displayed between 3 to 7 rounds Has been. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is deleted in order to prevent the effect of changing the display of the same symbol from being reproduced again during the next jackpot. Yes. Therefore, a jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot ends is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 19. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). Included.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S2115 (see FIG. 16) is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2112 in FIG. 16), it executes a power-off process in S2115. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2115 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S2115 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Determination of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2115. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be determined. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the data in the RAM 223 has not been destroyed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004.

  On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2115, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2005: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S2115, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2115 (see S2114 in FIG. 16). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2115 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2115 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 by the process of S2010, the interrupt permission is set and the start-up process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the main process executed after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S2101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), The processing proceeds to S2110 without performing the processing in S2102 to S2109.

  Here, in the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed, S2102 to S2109 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute each counter update process (see S2301 in FIG. 18) and command determination process (see FIG. 17) in S2111 in a short cycle in the decorative symbol variation display process in S2110. By executing the command determination process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2107 described later ( After that, a power-on notification process is executed (S2103).

  The power-on notification process (S2103) is a notification for notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. The notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device. 227. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2104 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2104, a customer waiting effect is executed (S2104). In the customer waiting effect, when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player (specifically, the time when the symbol variation display is not performed) has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), the third symbol display Settings such as switching the display of the device 81 to a title screen (demo screen) are performed, and the settings are transmitted to the display control device 114 as a demonstration execution command. Note that the time that is not played by the player is measured, for example, by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the demonstration execution command transmitted from the main control device 110 one second after the end of the variable display.

  Thereafter, the hold number display update process is executed (S2105), and the button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2106). In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 85 is performed according to the value of a number-of-holds counter (not shown). In the button input monitoring / production process, it is monitored whether the frame button 22 and the image saving button 23 are operated by the player to input an operation. This button input monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2107), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2108). In the lamp editing process (S2107), the setting of the lighting pattern of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the lighting pattern of the image storage lamp 23a are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b. Is set based on The lighting pattern of the image storage lamp 23a is set to light when the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is on, and is turned off when the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is off. In the sound editing / output process (S2108), the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. The

  After the process of S2108, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2107 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2108 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  The process of S2110 is a process of setting the effect form of the change effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81 and transmitting a command instructing the set aspect to the display control device 114. Details of the decorative symbol variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2111). Details of the command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the command determination process (S2111), it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2112). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2112 (S2112: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2114), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2115). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2116), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the storage of information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2112 (S2112: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2113), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2113: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed.

  If the RAM 223 is destroyed as a result of checking in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 16) described above.

  In this command determination process (S2111), first, from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control is performed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command is received from the device 110 (S2201).

  If the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2212). After the process of S2212, the fluctuation time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2213), this command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The variation time extracted by the process of S2213 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when a variation effect mode is set in a decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 18) described later.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is determined whether a stop symbol command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2202). If the stop symbol command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2202 (S2202: Yes), the stop symbol from the stop symbol command (usually big hit, probability variable big hit, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out completely) Any) is extracted (S2214), the command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The stop symbol extracted by the process of S2214 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when a stop symbol is set in a decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 18) described later.

  On the other hand, if a stop symbol command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2203). If a stop command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display controller 114 (S2211), and the command determination process (S2111) is terminated. Return to the main process.

  If a stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204), and a round number command may be received. If (S2204: Yes), the received round number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2215), the command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the main process returns.

  If a round number command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is next determined whether a jackpot end command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If a jackpot end command has been received from 110 (S2205: Yes), the received jackpot end command is output to the display controller 114 (S2216), and then the command determination process (S2111) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  If the jackpot end command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2205 (S2205: No), whether the image storage lamp lighting command has been received (S2206) and the image storage lamp lighting command has been received. Is discriminated (S2207). If the image storage lamp lighting command has been received in the processing of S2206 (S2206: Yes), the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is turned on (S2208), and the image storage lamp turning-off command has been received in the processing of S2207. If (S2207: Yes), the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is turned off, and the process proceeds to S2210. The image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is referred to when setting the lighting pattern of the image storage lamp 23a in the lamp editing process (see S2107 in FIG. 16).

  If the image storage lamp turn-on command and the image storage lamp turn-off command are not received in the processes of S2206 and S2207 (S2206: No, S2207: No), the process proceeds to S2210.

  In the process of S2210, a process according to another command is executed (S2210), the command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As processing according to other commands, processing according to other commands is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, or when the received other commands are commands used by the display control device 114, This is a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) described above.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in this decorative symbol variation display process (S2110), first, various counters (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 (a counter for setting the effect mode of the variation effect, a counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of normal big hit) Then, the updating process of the counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of detachment is executed (S2301).

  After the process of S2301, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2302). In the process of S2302, if the variation start flag is not on (that is, is off) (S2302: No), the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus this decorative symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag 223a is on in the process of S2302 (S2302: Yes), the variation start flag 223a is turned off (S2303), and the variation pattern in the process of S2210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 17). The variation time in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2204).

  After the processing of S2204, based on the variation time acquired by the processing of S2210 and the stop symbol extracted by the processing of S2211, the variation that sets the mode of variation display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 An effect setting process is executed (S2305), and a stop symbol setting process for setting a stop symbol displayed at the end of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2306).

  After execution of the stop symbol setting process (S2306), a display variation pattern command for instructing the variation display effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting processing (S2305) is output to the display control device 114. (S2307), and then a display stop symbol command for indicating the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2306) is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2308). The decorative symbol variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  The display control device 114 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S2307 and S2308.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the button input monitoring / effect process (S2106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) described above.

  When the button input monitoring / effect process (S2106) is executed, it is determined whether the image save button 23 is operated by the player to input the image save button 23 (S2401), and the image save button 23 is input. If it has been made (S2401: Yes), in order to make the display control device 114 recognize that the image storage button 23 has been operated, an image storage command is output to the display control device 114 (S2402). If the image save button 23 is not input in the process of S2401 (S2401: No), the process proceeds to S2403 without executing the process of S2402.

  In the processing of S2403, it is determined whether the player has operated the frame button 22 to input the frame button 22 (S2403). If the input of the frame button 22 has been performed (S2403: Yes), the frame button 22 is determined. An effect corresponding to the operation is set and the set effect command is output to the display control device 114 (S2404). If the frame button 22 is not input in the process of S2403 (S2403: No), the process of S2404 is not executed and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2106) is terminated.

  Note that the processing of S2404 is performed by, for example, pressing the frame button 22 when a notice character appears at the start of variable display, and displaying the expected value of jackpot due to the current variation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have the sense of expectation to a jackpot, or selecting one reach production | generation among several reach productions.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power-on and external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24, an example of the change of the effect of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 controlled by the display control apparatus 114 is demonstrated easily. FIG. 24 is a timing chart showing changes in performance of the third symbol display device 81 and a diagram showing changes in state. Note that the timing chart shown in FIG. 24 is a variation effect at the time of a big hit, and a variation effect of a premium reach where a man in a swimsuit appears as a premier effect.

  As shown in FIG. 24, when the variation effect is started at time t1, the variation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is started. After that, after 2 seconds (hereinafter referred to as “s” in the description of FIG. 24), the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the upper symbol is fixed (time t2), and after 0.5 s, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. The lower symbol is fixed (time t3). After the time t3 when the lower symbol is determined, a reach effect section is set.

  A swimsuit man appears 3s after the start of the reach effect (time t5) (the state shown in FIG. 6B). The player recognizes that it is a premier effect and operates the image saving button 23, and therefore, the image saving button 23 is input 1 s after a man in a swimsuit appears (time t6).

  After that, when the reach effect is continued and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and the middle symbol is confirmed (time t8), for example, the same symbol is stopped on the same line and the jackpot is confirmed. The jackpot presentation starts from time t9, but there is a margin of 3s between time t8 and time t9, and the presentation of re-changing the jackpot symbol is performed during the period of 3s.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player while the variation display of the symbol that shifts to the big hit is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81. The production performed in is reproduced and displayed during the big hit round. The effects that are reproduced during the big hit round are repeatedly reproduced for 10 seconds from the time when the image save button 23 is operated to 8 seconds after the image save button 23 is operated from the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player. Is done. That is, the time loss until the player operates the image saving button 23 is considered. Further, if the player operates the image save button 23 while the effect based on the player's operation of the image save button 23 is reproduced in the big hit round, the reproduced effect is stopped. It is configured to be displayed. Therefore, it is configured so that the player can surely view or photograph the premier effect during the jackpot with the mobile phone terminal. Each process performed by the display control apparatus 114 configured as described above will be described below.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This external interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the external interrupt process is executed with the reception of the command from the sound lamp control device 113, the received command is determined in the processes of S3001 to S3008. Specifically, in the process of S3001, it is determined whether the received command is an effect permission command (S3001). The effect permission command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 at the timing when the start-up process (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 ends. At this time, if the received command is an effect permission command (S3001: Yes), the effect permission flag 233a provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S3009), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a production permission command (S3001: No), it is determined whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S3002). At this time, if the received command is a display variation pattern command (S3002: Yes), the variation start flag 233b provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S3010), and the variation mode (reach) included in the display variation pattern command is determined. The production mode and the off-change production mode are extracted (S3011). Next, since the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is started, the demo screen flag 233c for instructing the demonstration effect is turned off in the third symbol display device 81 (S3012), and the external interruption process is ended. It should be noted that the variation mode extracted by the processing of S3011 is stored in a predetermined area in the work RAM 233 and is referred to in a variation effect process (see FIG. 22) described later.

  If the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S3002: No), it is determined whether the received command is a display stop symbol command (S3003). At this time, if the received command is a display stop symbol command (S3003: Yes), the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is set (S3013), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  If the received command is not a display stop symbol command (S3003: No), it is determined whether the received command is a stop command (S3004). At this time, if the received command is a stop command (S3004: Yes), the symbol stop flag 233d is turned on (S3014) to stop the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3014), and external interrupt processing is performed. finish.

  If the received command is not a stop command (S3004: No), it is determined whether the received command is a round number command (S3005). At this time, if the received command is a round number command (S3005: Yes), the number of big hits is extracted and stored in the round counter 233e of the work RAM 233 (S3015). Thereafter, when the round number command is transmitted from the main control device 110, the game is a big hit game, so the big hit flag 233f is turned on (S3016), and the external interruption process is terminated.

  If the received command is not a round number counter (S3005: No), it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot end command (S3006). At this time, if the received command is a jackpot end command (S3006: Yes), it is the jackpot end timing, so the jackpot middle flag 233f and the reproduction stop flag 233j are turned off (S3017), and then the image storage area 233h is set. The stored reproduction data and the image storage counter 233g are cleared (S3018), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, if the player operates the image storage button 23 while the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the variable display is performed. The medium production (for example, the premier production) is configured to be reproducible during the jackpot round. Therefore, if the premier effect is reproduced during the big hit, the display variation pattern command and the elapsed time stored in the image storage area 233h are initialized to prevent the same effect from being repeated repeatedly at the next big hit. doing.

  If the received command is not a jackpot end command (S3006: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a demonstration execution command (S3007). At this time, if the received command is a demonstration execution command (S3007: Yes), the demonstration execution flag 233c is turned on (S3019) because it is the timing for executing the demonstration effect in the third symbol display device 81. End external interrupt processing.

  If the received command is not a demonstration execution command (S3007: No), it is determined whether the received command is an image storage command (S3008). At this time, if the received command is an image save command (S3008: Yes), next, the player operates the image save button 23, and confirms whether the operation of the image save button 23 is valid. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid flag 233j is on (S3020). In the present embodiment, the image save button 23 is configured to be effective only when the jackpot is shifted to after the end of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is determined in the processing of S3020 whether the validity flag 233j indicating that the operation of the image saving button 23 is valid is on.

  If the operation of the image save button 23 is invalid and the valid flag 233j is off (S3020: No) in the process of S3020, the external interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of S3021 to S3028. On the other hand, if the valid flag 233j is on in the processing of S3020 (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 233f is on (S3021). In the processing of S3021, the big hit flag 233f is discriminated because of the operation of the image saving button 23 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, or the image while the big hit effect is being performed. This is to distinguish whether the save button 23 is operated.

  If the big hit flag 233f is off in the processing of S3021 (S3021: No), the operation of the image saving button 23 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 becomes valid. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the image storage counter 233g is smaller than 5 (S3022). The reason why the value of the image storage counter 233g is confirmed in the processing of S3022 is that, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the storage number of the effect of the variable display when the image storage button 23 is operated is up to five. .

  If the value of the image storage counter 233g is smaller than 5 in the processing of S3022 (S3022: Yes), the display variation pattern command instructing the variation display executed by the third symbol display device 81 at that time, and the variation The elapsed time from the start of the presentation is stored as reproduction data in the image storage area 233h (S3023). Thereafter, since the storage in the image storage area 233h is completed, 1 is added to the value of the image storage counter 233g (S3024), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player and reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored, the image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Instead of data (data for generating an image in units of screens as described above), a display variation pattern command for instructing a display form of variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and a point in time when the image saving button 23 is operated. Information on elapsed time is stored. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the storage capacity of the image storage area 233h as much as when image data is stored, a storage unit having a small maximum storage capacity can be used for the work RAM 233, and the apparatus cost can be reduced. it can.

  In the processing of S3022, if the value of the image storage counter 233g is 5 or more (S3022: No), since the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h has already reached the upper limit, the oldest reproduction data Are deleted, new reproduction data (display variation pattern command and elapsed time) are stored in the image storage area 233h (S3025), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  When the value of the image storage counter 233g is 5 or more (S3022: No), the oldest reproduction data is deleted and new reproduction data is stored, but the value of the image storage counter 233g is 5 If it is above, you may comprise so that new reproduction data may not be memorize | stored.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 233f is on in the processing of S3021 (S3021: Yes), the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled while the jackpot effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S3026). The reproduction stop flag 233j is a flag for determining whether to stop display of the variable display effect (image) reproduced based on the reproduction data during the jackpot or to restart the stop-displayed effect. Each time the save button 23 is operated, on / off is switched. Therefore, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is off (S3026: No), the reproduction stop flag 233j is turned on (S3027). If the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S3026: Yes), the reproduction stop flag 233j is turned off. (S3028), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  If the received command is not an image saving command (S3008: No), that is, the received command is a production permission command, a display variation pattern command, a display stop symbol command, a stop command, a round number command, If none of the jackpot end command, the demonstration execution command, or the image saving command, the processing corresponding to the other received command is executed (S3029), and the external interrupt processing is ended.

  Next, the main process executed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  The main process shown in FIG. 21 is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When the main process is started, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3101). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

  After executing the initial setting process (S3101), the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S3102), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S3103). . Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 is different from the area in the video RAM 234 that stores the character information decompressed in the process of S3103. The extracted character information is written in the area (S3104).

  After the process of S3104, it is determined whether or not the effect permission flag 233a provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S3105). If the production permission flag is OFF in the process of S3105 (S3105: No), the production permission command has not been received from the main control device 110. In this case, until the production permission command is received, that is, Until the effect permission flag 233a is turned on, the processing after S3106 is awaited. If the effect permission flag is turned on in the process of S3105 (S3105: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S3104 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And it transfers to the process after S3106.

  In the process of S3106, it is determined whether or not the demonstration execution flag 233c is on (S3106). If the demonstration execution flag 233c is ON in the process of S3106 (S3106: Yes), the demonstration screen effect process is executed (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111. If the demonstration execution flag 233c is off (S3106: No), it is determined whether the big hit medium flag 233f is on (S3108) because the variation effect process or the big hit effect process is performed.

  In the process of S3108, if the jackpot medium flag 233f is on (S3108: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S3109), and if the jackpot medium flag is off (S3108: No), the variable effect process is performed. (S3110), the process proceeds to S3111. A detailed description of the jackpot effect process (S3109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, and a detailed description of the change effect process (S3110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3111, since the process (S3107, S3109, S3110) for performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 is executed every 20 milliseconds (20 ms), 20 ms or more has elapsed since the process of S3106 was started. It is confirmed whether or not (S3111).

  As a result of checking in the process of S3111, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed (S3111: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more has elapsed, while if 20 ms or more has elapsed (S3111: Yes). The process proceeds to S3106. The processing from S3106 to S3111 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, the above-described variation effect process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this variable display process, first, it is determined whether the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is changing (S3201), and if not changing (S3201: No). Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 233b provided in the work RAM 233 is on (S3202).

  If the variation start flag 233b is turned on in the process of S3202 (S3202: Yes), the variation start flag 233b is turned off (S3203), and a variation time counter (not shown) for measuring the variation time provided in the work RAM 233 is shown. Z) is reset to 0 (S3204), and it is then determined whether or not the current variation start display is a big hit (S3205). The determination of whether the variation display to be started this time is a big hit depends on whether the stop symbol extracted and set from the display stop symbol command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is a hit or miss. Determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S3205 that the fluctuation display to be started this time is a big hit (S3205: Yes), in order to validate the operation of the image save button 23, the valid flag 233i is turned on and the image is displayed. In order to turn on the storage lamp 23a, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3206). If the current variation effect is not satisfied (S3205: No), the valid flag 233i is turned off and the image is displayed. In order to turn off the storage lamp 23a, an image storage lamp turn-off command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3209. In the processes of S3206 and S3207, the image storage lamp 23a is turned on or off depending on whether or not the operation of the image storage button 23 is enabled, so whether the image storage button 23 is enabled for the player. It can be recognized whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the image saving button 23 is made effective only when the fluctuation display to be started this time is a big hit. However, the big hit is a big hit and the probability big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The operation of the image save button 23 may be validated only when the image save button 23 is operated, or the operation of the image save button 23 is validated only when a specific effect (for example, a premier effect) appears during the variable display. It is good as a thing. That is, when the condition for increasing the game value given to the player is satisfied, the operation of the image storage button 23 is enabled and the image storage lamp 23a is turned on, so that the player is notified when the image storage button 23 is turned on. Recognize that it is a hot performance.

  Of course, the operation of the image saving button 23 may be validated even when the fluctuation display to be started this time is out of place. In this configuration, in the case of the next jackpot, the effect of changing display when the image saving button 23 is operated is reproduced, so that the player changes when the image saving button 23 is operated. The game can be continued with the expectation that the next jackpot will occur in order to view the display effect or take a picture with the mobile phone terminal.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the display executed by the third symbol display device 81 is changing (S3201: Yes), the change time counter (not shown) is updated (S3208), The process proceeds to S3209. The fluctuation time counter is updated by reading the value of the fluctuation time counter, adding 1 to the value, and writing the added value back to the fluctuation time counter.

  In the process of S3209, it is determined whether or not the symbol stop flag 233d is on (S3208). If the symbol stop flag 233d is not on (S3208: No), in the process of S3011 of the external interrupt process (see FIG. 20). From the variation effect data corresponding to the variation mode extracted from the variation pattern command for display, the variation effect data corresponding to the variation elapsed time indicated by the variation time counter (the elapsed time since the variation effect was started) is obtained from the video RAM 234. The data is read and stored in a variable effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3210). Next, an image corresponding to the variation effect data stored in the variation effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S3211), and the variation effect process (S3110) is terminated. In the processing of S3210 and S3211, the fluctuating effect data stored in the video RAM 234 is image data for each screen displayed on the LCD screen of the third symbol display device 81. A variable effect is performed by displaying continuously.

  On the other hand, if the symbol stop flag 233d is turned on as a result of the processing of S3209 (S3208: Yes), it is the timing to stop the symbol that is changing in the variable display, and is set in S3013 of the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). The symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stopped with the stopped symbols (S3212), the symbol stop flag 233d is turned off (S3213), and the variation effect process (3110) is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (when the symbol stop flag 233d is turned on), the symbol of the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped. However, since the variation time of the symbol is determined by the variation pattern command, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation time has elapsed based on the value of the variation time counter and stop the symbol.

  Next, the jackpot effect process (S3109) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect process (S3109) executed in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the jackpot effect process, first, the current number of rounds in the jackpot is acquired from the round counter 233e (S3301). Next, it is determined whether there is reproduction data that has not been reproduced and displayed during the big hit round among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (S3302). In the process of S3302, the value of the image storage counter g is 0 and no reproduction data is stored, or in the processes of S3307 and S3308, which will be described later, all reproductions of effects based on the reproduction data have been completed. Determined.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3302 that there is no reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the big hit round (S3302: No), a valid flag is set to invalidate the operation of the big hit image save button 23. In addition to turning off 233i, an image storage lamp turn-off command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to turn off the image storage lamp 23a (S3303). Then, in order to perform a normal jackpot round effect, effect data corresponding to the number of rounds is read from the video RAM 234, stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3312. Transition.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3302 that there is reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the jackpot round, the current current value is determined based on the value of the round counter 233e acquired in the processing of S3301. It is determined whether the number of rounds is 3 or more (S3305). In the processing of S3305, it is confirmed whether the current round number is 3 or more. In this embodiment, the saved images are displayed in rounds 1 and 2, for example, in rounds 3 to 7. And a description of the player participation type event that is performed during the jackpot, etc. are displayed, and it is possible to reproduce the effect when the image save button 23 is operated by the player between round 3 and round 7 This is because it is configured. Also, it is not confirmed whether or not it is round 7 or less. The upper limit of the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is five, and when all of them are reproduced and displayed, the processing of S3302 is This is because it is always No and the processing of S3303 and S3304 is executed.

  Further, the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced in the first half of the 16 rounds. That is, in the second half round, after the big hit, a promotion effect that shifts to a probable change state can be performed. Therefore, during the jackpot production, the first round will reproduce the production that the player wishes to view or shoot later on the mobile phone terminal, and the second round will be promoted to the probable state, The player can play the entire jackpot production with a sense of expectation.

  In the process of S3305, if the number of rounds is smaller than 3 (S3305: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3303, the operation of the image saving button 23 is invalidated (S3303), and the effect data corresponding to the number of rounds is video. The data is read from the RAM 234, stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  In the process of S3305, if the number of rounds is 3 or more (S3305: Yes), the reproduction of the effect based on the reproduction data is performed during the jackpot, and the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. The effective flag 233i is turned on in order to validate the operation of the image storage button 23 when the effect is resumed, and an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to turn on the image storage lamp 23a. (S3306). In the process of S3306, the image storage lamp lighting command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, so that the image storage lamp 23a is turned on. Therefore, the player is informed that the image storage button 23 can be operated even during the jackpot. Can be recognized. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the image storage button 23 is operated during the production of the variable display, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the image storage button 23 can be operated even during the jackpot, but the image storage lamp 23a. By turning on, the player can recognize that the image storage lamp 23 can be operated even during a big hit.

  Next, it is determined whether the reproduction of the effect is currently being executed based on the reproduction data (S3307). If the reproduction is not being performed (S3307: No), the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is used. In order to reproduce the effect, the oldest reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is acquired (S3308).

  In the process of S3309, the time corresponding to 2 seconds is subtracted from the elapsed time of the reproduction data acquired in the process of S3308 (S3309), and the process proceeds to S3310. In the present embodiment, the processing of S3309 is performed in order to start reproduction of the effect two seconds before the effect at the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player. This is a case where the premier effect is finished in a short time by reproducing the effect from 2 seconds before the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, and the player's operation of the image save button 23 is not in time. However, the premier production can be reproduced.

  If the reproduction of the effect based on the reproduction data is currently being executed in the processing of S3307 (S3307: No), the processing of S3308 and S3309 is not executed (that is, the reproduction data is newly acquired). None), the process proceeds to S3310.

  In the process of S3310, it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S3310). If the reproduction stop flag 233j is off (S3310: No), it is not necessary to stop and display the reproduced effect. Therefore, reproduction of the jackpot effect data for reproduction according to the display variation pattern command acquired in the process of S3308 and the elapsed time subtracted by 2 seconds in the process of S3309 is started based on the jackpot effect data. Is read out from the video RAM 234 according to the elapsed time from and stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3311), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  In the process of S3311, an effect is repeatedly performed for 10 seconds from the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player for 10 seconds (8 seconds from the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player). As shown in the figure, this is a process for repeatedly storing the jackpot effect data for reproduction according to the display variation pattern command and the elapsed time in the jackpot effect area of the video RAM 234. This is because the timing of winning a ball to the specific winning opening 65a is different in the big hit round, and each round time is different, so during the round, the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 This is to repeat the reproduction. Alternatively, the normal jackpot round effect may be executed when reproduction of the effect for 10 seconds is completed from 2 seconds before the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player.

  On the other hand, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is on in the processing of S3310 (S3310: Yes), an image for causing the player to stop and display the effect while the effect based on the reproduction data is being reproduced during the jackpot. Since the save button 23 has been operated, the process proceeds to S3312 without executing the process in S3311 (that is, without updating the effect data based on the reproduction data to the video RAM 234). Note that, in the process of S3310, when the update of the effect data based on the reproduction data is temporarily stopped, the elapsed time of the effect at which the reproduction is started is also temporarily stopped.

  When the reproduction stop flag 233j is on in the process of S3310, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being updated by not executing the process of S3311. Therefore, since the player can stop and display the display desired to be photographed on the mobile phone terminal or the like among the variable displays reproduced during the jackpot, the player can surely photograph the display that has been stopped and displayed. it can.

  In the process of S3312, an image corresponding to the jackpot effect data stored in the jackpot effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S3312), and this jackpot effect process (S3109) is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the image save button 23 is operated by the player while the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit. Then, the reproduction data that can reproduce the effect of the variable display when the image saving button 23 is operated is stored in the image saving area 233h. Then, when the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and the jackpot is shifted to the jackpot, the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced and displayed during the jackpot round. The Therefore, the player can visually recognize the premier effect during the jackpot by operating the image save button 23 when a rare effect such as a premier effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. Mobile phone terminals can be prepared with plenty of room, so you can shoot premier effects and save them as photos.

  The operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled while the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the display is immediately changed by operating the image operation button 23. During the jackpot, the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal. Here, even if the player operates the image storage button 23 and the reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored in the image storage area 233h, thereafter, the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed a plurality of times. When it is performed (for example, hundreds of times), it becomes difficult for the player to know at what timing the effect of the variable display stored by operating the image storage button 23 is stored. As a result, it is conceivable that the player's willingness to operate the image storage button 23 is reduced. However, since the player can reproduce the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image storage button 23 during the big hit that immediately shifts by operating the image operation button 23, the willingness to operate the image storage button 23 provided at the corner is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, for example, if the variation display effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is configured to be reproducible during another variation display, the current variation display is the current variation display effect. If the player operates the image saving button 23, it becomes impossible to determine the effect of the variable display, and the reliability of the variable display is lowered. However, in this embodiment, since the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is performed during the jackpot, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the effect of the variable display from being lowered.

  In addition, when the image storage button 23 is operated by the player and the reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored in the image storage area 233h, the image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Instead of data (data for generating an image in units of screen as described above, for example, bitmap data), a display variation pattern command for instructing a display form of variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and image storage Information on the elapsed time when the button 23 is operated is stored. When the player operates the image storage button 23 based on the display variation pattern command stored in the image storage area 233h and information on the elapsed time when the image storage button 23 is operated, the third The effects performed in the symbol display device 81 are reproduced and displayed in the big hit round (round 3 to round 7). Therefore, in order to reproduce the effect performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the player operates the image saving button 23, for example, it is not necessary to store bitmap data having a large amount of data. It is not necessary to secure a large storage capacity of the storage area 233h. Therefore, a RAM having a small maximum storage capacity can be used as the work RAM 233, and the apparatus cost can be reduced.

  Further, in the case where the reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored in the image storage area 233h, the bit data after the player operates the image storage button 23 in the configuration in which the bitmap data or the like is stored. Map data will be stored. Further, as described above, some of the premier effects performed during variable display end in a short time. In other words, when the player operates the image saving button 23, the premier effect may end, and in this case, bitmap data after the time when the player operates the image saving button 23 is stored. Even so, the effect that the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal is not reproduced. However, in this embodiment, when the player operates the image saving button 23, the display variation pattern command for instructing the display form of the variation display performed on the third symbol display device 81 and the image saving button 23 are operated. Since the information on the elapsed time at the time is stored in the image storage area 233h, it is possible to freely set the effect reproduced during the jackpot (the period for reproducing and displaying it freely), and the player can view or carry it You can reproduce and display the effect you want to shoot on the phone terminal.

  Further, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the effect (premier effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reproduced and displayed during the rounds 3 to 7 of the big hit. If the player operates the image save button 23 again while the effect is reproduced during the big hit round, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player operates the image save button 23 while the premiere effect is being reproduced during the jackpot, thereby stopping and displaying the image desired to be viewed or viewed with the mobile phone terminal among the premier effect. Therefore, the stopped and displayed image can be surely viewed or taken with a mobile phone terminal. In particular, when shooting with a mobile phone terminal, if it is a video, there is a possibility that it will be blurred or blurred even if it is shot. You can re-shoot. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the desired image or capture the image with the mobile phone terminal.

In addition, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player and the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, when the image save button 23 is operated again by the player, the effect that is stopped and displayed is displayed. Resumed. Therefore, even if there are a plurality of presentations in which the player wants to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal is being reproduced, the player can operate the image save button 23 again to continue the presentation. Resumed. For example, if the effect that is being reproduced is stopped and displayed, and if the image save button 23 is operated again, if the effect is reproduced from the beginning, all effects (for 10 seconds) There is a possibility that it cannot be reproduced). However, the image save button 23 is displayed while the reproduced effect is stopped.
When is operated again, the reproduction is resumed from the time point when the stop is displayed, so that there is a high possibility that the effect can be reproduced during the round. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of displays for which visual recognition or shooting with a mobile phone terminal is desired during the reproduction of one, the player can easily view the desired presentation with visual or mobile phone terminals.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the operation of the image storage button 23 is enabled only when the current variation display is a big hit, and the player saves the image save button 23 with a big hit effect that shifts after the change display stops. It was configured to reproduce and display the effects when operating. In addition to this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the player intentionally stops the game and the demonstration production is started, the player operates the image saving button 23 in the demonstration production. It is also assumed that there is a configuration that reproduces and displays the effect of the case. In addition, about the structure same as 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment enables the operation of the image saving button 23 to be effective when the effect reproduced during the demonstration effect is stopped and displayed, so the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is effective. In step S3021 of the external interrupt processing executed in step S1021, it is determined whether the demonstration effect is being performed instead of determining whether the big hit flag 233f is on.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the changing effect process (S3110) and the demo screen effect process (S3107) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 shows a demonstration screen executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production process.

  When the variation effect process shown in FIG. 25 is executed and the variation time counter is reset (S3204), an effective flag is used to validate the operation of the image saving button 23 regardless of whether or not the current variation effect is a big hit. While turning on 233i, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to light the image storage lamp 23a (S4001), and the process proceeds to S3209.

  Also, in the process of S3209, the symbol stop flag 233d is on, and the symbol is stopped. When the symbol stop flag 233d is turned off (S3213), the valid flag 233i is set to invalidate the operation of the image save button 23. In addition to turning off, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 to turn off the image storage lamp 23a (S4002), and the variation effect process (S3110) is terminated.

  In other words, the second embodiment is configured such that the operation of the image saving button 23 is valid while the changing effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the demonstration screen processing shown in FIG. 26 is executed, it is determined whether there is reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the demonstration effect among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (S4101). In the processing of S4101, the value of the image storage counter g is 0 and no reproduction data is stored, or in the processing of S4110 and S4111 described later, the reproduction of the effects based on the reproduction data has been completed. Determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S4101 that there is reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed in the demonstration effect (S4101: Yes), an image save button for stopping and displaying the effect reproduced during the demonstration effect. The effective flag 233i is turned on to validate the operation 23, and an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 to light the image storage lamp 23a (S4105).

  Next, it is determined whether the reproduction of the effect is being executed based on the reproduction data (S4106). If the reproduction is not being performed (S4106: No), the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is used. In order to reproduce the effect, the oldest reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is acquired (S4107). Further, the process of S4106 is being reproduced even when a predetermined wait time (for example, about 2 seconds) has not elapsed after the reproduction of the effect of the variable display based on the previous reproduction data has been completed. Determined.

  In the process of S4108, the elapsed time of the reproduction data acquired in the process of S4107 is subtracted from the time corresponding to 2 seconds (S4108), and the process proceeds to S4109. In the present embodiment, the process of S4108 is for the reproduction of the production to be started 2 seconds before the production at the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player. By reproducing the effect from 2 seconds before the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the appearance of characters and the like ends in a short time, and the player's operation of the image save button 23 is in time for the effect. Even if it is not, it is possible to reproduce an effect that ends in a short time.

  If it is determined in step S4106 that an effect is being reproduced based on the reproduction data (S4106: No), the process proceeds to step S4109 without executing steps S4107 and S4108.

  In the process of S4109, it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S4109). If the reproduction stop flag 233j is off (S4109: No), there is no need to stop and display the reproduced effect. Therefore, the video RAM 234 according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction of reproduction effect data according to the display variation pattern command acquired in the process of S4107 and the elapsed time subtracted by 2 seconds in the process of S4108. This is read out and stored in the demonstration screen effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S4110), and the process proceeds to S4111.

  On the other hand, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is turned on in the process of S4109 (S4109: Yes), the image storage button 23 has been operated to stop and display the effect reproduced during the demonstration effect, so the process of S4110 Is executed (that is, the effect data based on the reproduction data is not updated in the video RAM 234), and the process proceeds to S4111. If the processing of S4109 is Yes and the update of the effect data based on the reproduction data is temporarily stopped, the elapsed time of the effect at which the reproduction is started is also temporarily stopped.

  When the reproduction stop flag 233j is on in the process of S4109 (S4109: Yes), the display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being updated by not executing the process of S4110. become. Therefore, the player can stop and display the display desired to be photographed on the mobile phone terminal among the variable displays reproduced during the demonstration production. Can do.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4101 that there is no reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the demonstration production (S4101: No), the valid flag 233i is set to invalidate the operation of the image saving button 23. In addition to turning off, an image storage lamp turn-off command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 to turn off the image storage lamp 23a (S4102). In order to produce a normal demonstration screen, the demonstration production data corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the demonstration screen is read from the video RAM 234 and stored in a demonstration production area (not shown) of the video RAM 234. (S4103).

  Then, the execution of the processing of S4103 means that the reproduction of effects based on all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h has been completed, so the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is deleted. At the same time, the image storage counter 233g is initialized (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4111.

  In the process of S4111, an image corresponding to the jackpot effect data stored in the jackpot effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S4111), and the jackpot effect process (S3107) is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the demonstration is performed when the period during which the variable display is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (1 minute in the present embodiment). During the performance, the variation display effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced and displayed. Therefore, if the player suspends the game by releasing the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1) or the like, the effect of the variable display when the image save button 23 is operated is reproduced and displayed. Depending on the player's will, the effect of the variable display when the image storage button 23 is operated can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  Further, for all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h, when reproduction of the effect of the variable display is finished, the reproduction data in the image storage area 233h is deleted and an initial value is set to the value of the image storage counter 233g. Is done. That is, when the demonstration effect ends, reproduction data is not stored in the image storage area 233h. Therefore, next time when the demonstration effect is performed, the effect reproduced in the previous demonstration effect is not repeatedly reproduced. It is possible to prevent giving a player a pleasant feeling.

  Further, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the effect (premier effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reproduced and displayed during the demonstration effect. If the player operates the image save button 23 while the effect is being reproduced during the demonstration effect, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, and the image save button 23 is operated again. Then, the effect that was stopped and displayed is resumed and reproduced. Therefore, the player operates the image save button 23 while the premiere effect is being reproduced during the demonstration effect, thereby stopping and displaying the image desired to be photographed by the visual recognition or the mobile phone terminal among the premier effect. be able to. Therefore, the player can surely view or photograph the stopped display image with the mobile phone terminal, and there are a plurality of displays in which the desired display for viewing or photographing with the mobile phone terminal is being reproduced. Even in this case, the desired effect can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the second embodiment, for all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h, when reproduction of the effect of the variable display is finished, the reproduction data in the image storage area 233h is deleted and the value of the image storage counter 233g is used. However, when a new display variation pattern command is received in a state where the demonstration effect is being performed, that is, when the demonstration effect ends, the image storage area 233h The reproduction data may be deleted and an initial value may be set as the value of the image storage counter 233g. Since the player has operated the operation handle 51 to receive the display variation pattern command in the state where the demonstration effect is being performed, the player can display his own reproduction display of the variation display effect. It was canceled by will. Therefore, it is possible to provide gameability according to the player's will.

  In the second embodiment, the player can reproduce and display the variable display effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 in either the jackpot effect or the demo effect. Thus, it may be configured to reproduce and display the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23. If the player can reproduce and display the variable display effect when the player operates the image save button 23 only during the jackpot effect, when the player operates the image save button 23 during the variable display, the image In order to view the effect of the variable display by the operation of the save button 23 or to shoot with the mobile phone terminal, it is possible to play a game while expecting a shift to jackpot. Also, if the player can reproduce and display the variation display effect when the player operates the image storage button 23 only during the demonstration performance, the image can be immediately saved by interrupting the game at the player's will. The effect of the variable display by the operation of 23 can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the second embodiment, the reproduction of the effect of the variable display is finished for all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h, and the normal demonstration effect is displayed when there is no reproduction data that is not reproduced. However, when the demonstration effect is started, if one or more reproduction data is stored in the image storage area 233h, the reproduction of the variable display effects based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is performed in order. You may comprise so that it may display repeatedly.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the customer waiting effect process (see S2104 in FIG. 16) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a demonstration execution command is displayed when one minute has passed after the variable display is ended. However, the display control device 114 may be configured to measure the elapsed time after the end of the variable display and perform a demonstration effect when the elapsed time has passed 1 minute. In this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a demonstration execution command transmitted from the main control device 110 one second after the end of the variable display, the received demonstration execution command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 In 114, the elapsed time from the reception of the demonstration execution command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is measured. Further, in the main process of the display control device 114, a process of determining whether one minute has elapsed after the end of the variable display is executed instead of the process of determining whether the demonstration execution flag 233c is on in the process of S3106. Is done. Further, the main control device 110 determines whether one minute has elapsed since the end of the variable display, and when one minute has elapsed since the end of the variable display, the main control device 110 displays the sound lamp control device 113 (display). The demonstration execution command may be transmitted to the control device 114), and the demonstration effect may be started at the timing when the display control device 114 receives the demonstration execution command.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments, the image saving button 23 is displayed while the effect of the variable display based on the operation of the image saving button 23 by the player is reproduced on the third symbol display device 81. When operated, the reproduction is reproduced and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments, a “+” button or a “−” button is displayed in a state in which the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. When operated, the stop-displayed image is configured to be capable of frame advance and frame reverse. In the following description, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and different parts from the second embodiment will be omitted for simplification of description. Therefore, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing button input monitoring / production processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 28 is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 113 according to the third embodiment.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a cross key including a “+” button and a “−” button is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. The work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment is provided with an elapsed time counter 233m and an elapsed time change flag 233n in addition to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

  The elapsed time counter 233m is a counter that indicates the elapsed time of the effect to be reproduced when the effect when the player operates the image storage button 23 is reproduced, and the image save button 23 is operated by the player. In this case, the elapsed time of the production of the variable display is shown. In the present embodiment, when the “+” button command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the elapsed time counter 233m adds a value corresponding to 0.1 second (see S4602 in FIG. 28), and the sound lamp control device 113. When the “−” button command is received from “1”, a value corresponding to 0.1 second is subtracted (S4605 in FIG. 28).

  The elapsed time change flag 233n is a flag for determining whether or not the “+” button or the “−” button is operated by the player while the reproduced image is stopped and displayed. It is turned on every time a “+” button command or a “−” button command is received from 113 (see S4603 and S4606 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when an effect corresponding to the elapsed time changed in the processing of S3311 is set. (See S4702 in FIG. 29).

  When the button input monitoring / effect process shown in FIG. 27 is executed and the process according to the presence / absence of the operation of the frame button 22 is completed (S2403: No or S2404), it is then determined whether the “+” button has been operated. (S4501), if the “+” button is operated (S4501: Yes), the “+” button command is output to the display control device 114 (S4502), and if the “+” button is not operated (S4501: No), the process proceeds to S4503 without performing the process in S4502.

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the “−” button has been operated (S4503). If the “−” button has been operated (S4503: Yes), the “−” button command is output to the display control device 114 ( In S4504), if the "-" button is not operated (S4503: No), the button input monitoring / effect process is terminated without performing the process of S4504.

  When the external interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 is executed and it is determined that the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is not an image storage command (S3008: No), it is determined whether the received command is a “+” button command. It is determined (S4601).

  If the received command is a “+” button command in the process of S4601 (S4601: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 233m is added by 0.1 second (S4602), and the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on ( If the received command is not a “+” button command (S4603), the process proceeds to S4604 without executing S4602 and S4603.

  In the process of S4604, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a “−” button command (S4604). If the received command is a “−” button command in the process of S4604 (S4604: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 233m is subtracted by 0.1 second (S4605) and the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on ( In S4606), if the received command is not a “−” button command (S4604: No), the external interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of S4605 and S4606.

  In addition, every time a “+” button command or a “−” button command is received, the elapsed time is added or subtracted by 0.1 seconds. However, the addition or subtraction time may be 0.5 seconds. The time can be set as appropriate. Also, a created counter for screen data created to display the effect on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided, and one (or a plurality) of screen data is added to or subtracted from the counter. You may comprise as follows. By providing a created counter and adding / subtracting the number of creations of screen data to be displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of operations of the “+” button or “−” button by the player, and the third symbol The correspondence with the image displayed on the display device 81 becomes accurate.

  When the jackpot effect process shown in FIG. 29 is executed and it is determined that the reproduction stop flag 233k is on (S3310: Yes), the effect reproduced on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on in order to confirm whether or not the “+” button or the “−” button when the stop-displayed image is moved forward or backward is operated by the player. Is discriminated (S4701).

  If the elapsed time change flag 233n is off in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), the “+” button or the “−” button is not operated by the player, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. Since the image may be displayed as it is, the process proceeds to S3312. On the other hand, if the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on in the process of S4701 (S4701: Yes), it is necessary to display the stopped display image of the third symbol display device 81 by frame-by-frame display. The jackpot effect data corresponding to the variation pattern command and the elapsed time changed by the “+” button command or the “−” button command is stored in the video RAM 234 (S4702), and then the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned off. (S4703), the process proceeds to S3312.

  In other words, if it is determined in step S4701 that the elapsed time change flag 233n is on, an effect corresponding to the elapsed time that is added or subtracted according to the operation of the “+” button or the “−” button in step S4702. Since the data is stored in the video RAM 234, on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the stopped display image is displayed in a display mode in which frame advance or frame return is performed. Therefore, the player can stop and display on the third symbol display device 81 an image desired to be viewed or taken with the mobile phone terminal.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the “+” button or the “−” button is displayed in a state where the effect reproduced on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the player's operation. When is operated, the stopped image is displayed by frame advance or frame return. Therefore, when the player operates the “+” button or the “−” button, the image stopped and displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be forwarded or moved back, so that the reproduced image is stopped and displayed. Even when the operation of the image saving button 23 for delaying is delayed, the image desired by the player can be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make sure that the image desired by the player is visually recognized or photographed by the mobile phone terminal.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the image saving button 23 is made effective, and the effect of the variable display is being made a big hit or demonstration effect. It was configured to be reproduced and displayed. Instead, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled when the jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the effect during the jackpot is displayed as the image saving button. 23 can be reproduced and displayed during the jackpot operated. In the following description, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and different parts from the second and third embodiments will be omitted for the sake of simplicity. Therefore, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot presentation, and FIG. 31 shows an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a change effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 33 is an MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 113 of the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot production process performed by.

  Although not shown, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment is provided with a reproduction stop permission flag 233k in addition to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. The reproduction stop permission flag 233k enables the operation of the image storage button 23 when selecting an effect to be reproduced during the jackpot, or enables the operation of the image storage button 23 when stopping or displaying the reproduced effect. It is a flag that determines whether or not This reproduction stop permission flag 233k is used when the reproduction of the effect is started in the big hit round on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the operation of the image saving button 23 when the reproduced effect is stopped or displayed is resumed. It is turned on to enable (S5106), and turned off when display of another round in which the effect is not reproduced is started (S5102).

  First, an example of a jackpot effect will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot effect shown in FIG. 30 (a) is a normal jackpot effect, and on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a display of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed in a variable display when the jackpot is reached ( In FIG. 30 (a), “7 dugong display” and the number of big hits (in FIG. 30 (a), “4” round display) are displayed. As a background display, a state where a plurality of fish are swimming on the seabed is displayed.

  On the other hand, the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 30 (b) is a premium jackpot effect, for example, an effect displayed when the jackpot including probability variation and time reduction continues five or more times. In this premier effect, a combination of symbols and the number of rounds during the jackpot are displayed in the same way as a normal jackpot. Then, as a background display, a girl in a swimsuit of a live-action image is displayed on the beach (in this embodiment, three girls' videos).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the external interruption process performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

  If an external interrupt process is executed and the valid flag 233i is on in the process of S3020 (S3020: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is on (S5001), and the reproduction stop permission flag 233k. Is ON (S5001: Yes), the operation of the image save button 23 is enabled in the state where the effect based on the reproduction data is reproduced, so the process proceeds to S3026 and the reproduction stop flag 233j is determined. (S3026) After executing the process of turning on or off the reproduction stop flag 233j (S3027, S3028), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is off (S5001: No), the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled in a state where the effect based on the reproduction data is not reproduced and the premier effect is being performed. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S3022, and if the value of the image storage counter 233g is smaller than 5 in the process of S3022 (S3022: Yes), the round in which the image storage button 23 is operated (that is, the premier effect is performed). Round) and the elapsed time from the start of the round effect when the image save button 23 is operated are stored as reproduction data in the image save area 233h (S5002), and the value of the image save counter 233g is set to 1. Addition is performed (S3024), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player to store reproduction data for reproducing the big hit effect, it is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Rather than the image data (data for generating the image in units of screens described above), the number of rounds with a big hit and information on the elapsed time when the image save button 23 is operated are stored. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the storage capacity of the image storage area 233h as much as when image data is stored, a storage unit having a small maximum storage capacity can be used for the work RAM 233, and the apparatus cost can be reduced. it can.

  The variation effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 32 is configured so that the fourth embodiment reproduces and displays the jackpot premiere effect during the jackpot, Since the display of the variable display is configured so as not to be reproduced later, the processing of S3205 to S3207 for setting the operation of the image saving button 23 to be valid or invalid is deleted. That is, when the variation time counter is reset in the process of S3204 (S3204), a process of determining whether the symbol stop flag 233d is on is executed (S3209).

  Of course, in the fourth embodiment, the operation of the image saving button 23 may be validated while the variation display effect is being performed, and the variation display effect may be reproducible during the big hit round. . In this configuration, if the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is only the data corresponding to the effect of the variable display, the effect is reproduced in rounds 3 to 7 of the big hit and stored in the image storage area 233h. When there is a possibility that the reproduction data is mixed with reproduction data according to the presentation of the variable display and the premiere effect of the jackpot (that is, when this jackpot is a jackpot for performing the premiere effect), the final round or You may comprise so that an effect may be reproduced in the continuous round including the last round.

  When the jackpot effect process shown in FIG. 33 is executed and it is determined that there is unreproduced reproduction data (3202: Yes), the current round number acquired in the process of S3301 is an image from 16 which is the maximum round number. It is determined whether or not the value of the storage counter 233g is greater than the value obtained by subtraction (S5101). In the fourth embodiment, it is configured to reproduce and display effects in the latter half of the round including the final round of jackpot, and up to five pieces of reproduction data can be stored in the image storage area 233h. The production is configured to be reproduced.

  Furthermore, since the value of the image storage counter 233g is subtracted from the maximum number of rounds of 16, if there is only one reproduction data, the effect is reproduced only in the final round, and even if there are multiple pieces of reproduction data, the final round Production is reproduced in successive rounds including In other words, when the jackpot premiere effect is reproduced later, it is performed in the second half including the final round among the big hit rounds, so the first half round can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, since many premiere effects and the like can be displayed using many rounds in the first half, the types of display modes are also increased, and the effects of the big hit can be diversified.

  If the current round number is equal to or smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the value of the image storage counter 233g from the maximum number of rounds 16 in the process of S5101, (S5101: No), based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h. Since this is not a round in which the production is reproduced, as described above, the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is turned off to prevent the reproduction stop flag 233j from being turned on or off (S5102).

  After completion of the processing of S5102, it is determined whether or not it is a round for executing the premier effect (S5103). If it is not a round for executing the premier effect (S5103: No), the process proceeds to S3303, and the normal jackpot If it is a round in which the effect is performed and the premier effect is executed (S5103: Yes), the enable flag 233i is turned on and the image storage lamp is turned on in order to validate the operation of the image storage button 23 when reproducing the premier effect later. In order to light 23a, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S5104). Then, the jackpot effect data corresponding to the premium effect is stored in the jackpot effect area of the video RAM 234 (S5105), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  If the current number of rounds is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the value of the image storage counter 233g from the maximum number of rounds 16 (S5101: Yes) in the processing of S5101, the reproduction stop flag 233j is changed to ON or OFF. After the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is turned on (S5106), the valid flag 233i is turned on and an image storage lamp lighting command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3306). Continue processing.

  If the reproduction stop flag 233j is OFF in the process of S3310 (S3310: No), the number of rounds stored in the process of S5002 of the external interrupt process and the elapsed time subtracted by 2 seconds in the process of S3309 Is reproduced from the video RAM 234 according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction based on the jackpot effect data, and stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234. (S5107), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the premiere effect is performed in the big hit round, the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled while the premier effect is performed, and the image is displayed. When the save button 23 is operated, the premier effect is reproduced and displayed in the round after the jackpot. Therefore, since the premiere effect that is a big hit can be reproduced and displayed later, the player can view the premier effect or the like later by operating the image saving button 23 or using a mobile phone terminal.

  Here, as described above, since the occurrence frequency of the jackpot is extremely low with respect to the number of variable displays, until the next jackpot occurrence, the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is not reproduced, While the game can be continued with a sense of expectation until the next jackpot, there is a possibility that the willingness to operate the image saving button 23 will be reduced if many variable displays are made before the next jackpot. However, when the player operates the image saving button 23 to reproduce the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the reproduction is performed during the jackpot, so that the user is willing to operate the image saving button 23. It can suppress that it falls.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the premiere effect is reproduced in a later round, the operation of the image saving button 23 is configured to be valid, but other than the round in which the effect is reproduced (the final round or the final round) The operation of the image storage button 23 may be validated in all rounds (except for consecutive rounds including). In other words, in this configuration, the image save button 23 becomes effective in all rounds, so the processes of S3303, S3306, and S5104 are deleted, and the valid flag 233i is turned on while the jackpot effect is being executed. At the same time, an image storage lamp lighting command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the player can easily shoot not only the premier effects but also all round effects with the mobile phone terminal or the like, so that the display according to the player's preference can be viewed or photographed with the mobile phone terminal. Whether the player is operating the image saving button 23 for reproducing the jackpot effect in a later round, or is the operation of the image saving button 23 for stopping or resuming the reproduced effect being reproduced? Therefore, it is preferable to display which one of the operations of the image save button 23 is effective in each round.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated during the jackpot, the effect of the player operating the image save button 23 is reproduced and displayed during the jackpot. When the next jackpot is made, it is possible to reproduce and display the effect of the player operating the image saving button 23. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation until the next big hit. Furthermore, it is good also as what is reproduced and displayed on the demonstration screen after jackpot end. Also, depending on the game state (whether it is a probable change) after the jackpot is over, it will be changed whether it will be reproduced during the current jackpot or displayed during the next jackpot. It may be configured. In other words, if the gaming state after the jackpot is definitely changed, the next jackpot is likely to occur with the number of variable displays, so even if it is configured to reproduce the presentation during the next jackpot, the player It can be suppressed that the willingness to operate the image save button 23 is reduced.

  In the fourth embodiment, the premier effect is reproduced in the last round or consecutive rounds including the last round (up to 5 rounds). For example, after 9 rounds (that is, the latter half) If there is, you can reproduce the production in any round. In other words, if there are 8 rounds in the first half, 1 to 8, it is possible to sufficiently display a premier effect or the like.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that reproduction of a premier effect may be performed all in the last round. This configuration eliminates the need for the player to play the game while holding the mobile phone terminal for a maximum of 5 rounds, so that the player can play a big hit game (such as visual recognition of the performance) before the last round. You can concentrate. Also, for example, if a plurality of premier effects are performed before round 13 and the premier effects are reproduced in rounds 14 and 15, or if the player operates the image save button 23 a plurality of times, It may be configured to reproduce the effect in the final round by selecting whether the effect is reproduced and displayed, and the jackpot effect can be diversified and the gameability can be improved. The upper limit of the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h may be 1.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the effect reproduced during the big hit round is stopped and displayed, it is of course possible to perform frame advance or frame reverse by operating the “+” button or the “−” button. I do not care.

  The present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the player operates the image saving button 23, the effect reproduced on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed during the jackpot or the demonstration effect. A sound output device 226 (auxiliary effect means) that outputs sound linked to an effect (variation display or jackpot effect) performed on the symbol display device 81, and a display linked to an effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 The lamp display device 227 (auxiliary effect means) that performs the above may be configured to be reproduced. In this configuration, for example, when reproducing an effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 starts and reproduces a command or effect indicating reproduction data from the audio lamp control device 113. You may comprise so that the command which shows a stop may be transmitted. Further, in this configuration, since the overall effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 can be reproduced, the player can visually recognize the overall effect later or shoot with the mobile phone terminal. In addition, when it has the accessory which operate | moves in conjunction with the production performed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, you may comprise so that the accessory may be reproduced similarly.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect for 10 seconds from 2 seconds before the time when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced and displayed during the jackpot or demonstration effect. A corresponding effect may be reproduced and displayed while the save button 23 is being operated. In this configuration, the display variation pattern command or jackpot round number in the image storage area 233h, the variation display when the image storage button 23 is started to operate, the elapsed time since the start of the round, and the operation of the image storage button 23 Is stored, and the elapsed time from the start of the round is stored. Based on the display variation pattern command or the number of rounds and the elapsed time of the operation start and operation end of the image save button 23, An effect or a jackpot premier effect is reproduced and displayed. Therefore, among the effects performed on the 3rd symbol display device 18, the effect of only the part where the player operated the image save button 23 can be reproduced and displayed, so that the effect that the player considers unnecessary is displayed later. Can be prevented.

  In the first to third embodiments, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the elapsed time of the variable display stored in the image save area 233h is acquired based on the change time counter. However, it may be configured to store the number of image data in units of screens created for performing variable display on the LCD screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this configuration, since the elapsed time can be measured by the number of image data displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to accurately acquire the elapsed time of the variable display when the image save button 23 is operated. Become. Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of the round in which the jackpot premier effect is performed may be measured based on the number of image data created to display the premier effect. good.

  Further, in the first, third, and fourth embodiments, the reproduction of the effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced and displayed during one big hit round. It is good also as what displays. For example, there are cases where the premier reach has a fluctuation time exceeding 1 minute, and the player may want to visually recognize or record all of the premier reach on a mobile phone terminal. In this case, if the reproduction of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is performed only in one round, not all the Premier Reach can be visually recognized and cannot be recorded on the mobile phone terminal. However, if the reproduction of the effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is displayed over a plurality of rounds, it is possible to reproduce and display a change display for a long period during the big hit.

  In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, in addition to the image save button 23, a cross key or the like may be provided in the vicinity of the image save button 23. In this configuration, in the jackpot round 1 or round 2, an overview of the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (partial presentation of the variable display and the time when the saving was performed) is displayed, and the jackpot round You may comprise so that the reproduction data to reproduce and display inside can be selected with a cross key. Similarly, when the demonstration effect is started, an outline of the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h may be displayed, and the reproduction data to be reproduced and displayed may be selected with the cross key.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the image preservation | save button 23 is operated and the production currently performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is preserve | saved as reproduction data, for a predetermined period (for example, image preservation | save button 23 is operated. It may be informed that the image is being stored for 8 seconds during which the effect of the variable display is reproduced. This notification may display “image is being stored” on a part of the LCD screen of the third symbol display device 81, or the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 notifies that the image is being stored. You may do it.

  In the first to third embodiments, the display variation pattern command for instructing the variation display when the image storage button 23 is operated and the time point when the image storage button 23 is operated are displayed in the image storage area 233h. However, it is also possible to store image data in units of screens for performing variable display on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, moving image data). In this configuration, it is assumed that image data corresponding to variable display while the image save button 23 is being operated is stored. Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, image data for each screen for performing a premier effect may be stored as it is.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the display of the variable display and the jackpot effect when the image save button 23 is operated can be reproduced and displayed on the LCD screen of the third symbol display device. A light emitting unit that emits infrared light is provided on the player's mobile phone terminal via the light emitting unit, and a dynamic display effect moving image and a jackpot premier effect moving image are displayed when the image save button 23 is operated. You may comprise so that the data of the screen of the 3 symbol display apparatus 81 etc. may be transferred. In this configuration, the player can save the trouble of shooting with the mobile phone terminal.

  In addition, various variable display videos and jackpot round videos performed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in an external server, and each of the various variable display videos and jackpot round videos is stored in the external server. An address on the Internet is associated, and when the image save button 23 is operated, the address on the Internet corresponding to the moving image when the image save button 23 is operated is displayed, and the address on the Internet On the other hand, when accessed with a mobile phone terminal, it may be configured such that a variable display or a round video can be downloaded. In addition, instead of an address on the Internet, an image may be displayed that allows access to the address on the Internet by capturing an image using a photo function of the mobile phone terminal.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper limit number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h may be changed according to the number of times the variable display is performed after the power is turned on, the number of reach times, and the number of jackpots. The period during which the image storage button 23 can be operated may be changed. For example, the upper limit of the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h can be increased or the image storage button 23 can be operated as the number of times the variable display is performed after the power is turned on, the number of times of reach, and the number of jackpots increases. It may be configured to add a period. In this configuration, as the player continues the game, the upper limit number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h increases and the period during which the image storage button 23 can be operated increases. Can increase the willingness to continue.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the date and time when the image storage button 23 is operated, the name of the player, the store name of the hall, etc. are input to the image of the change display and the jackpot effect when the image storage button 23 is operated. You may comprise. In this configuration, there is provided an effect (mode) in which the date and time when the image save button 23 is operated, the name of the player, the store name of the hall, and the like, and the date and time when the image save button 23 is operated by the button operation and the name of the player In addition, it may be configured such that the store name of the hall can be input.

  In the above embodiment, if the image save button 23 is operated by the player during the variable display or the jackpot, the effect (for example, the premier effect) when the image save button 23 is operated is the jackpot or demo effect. It has a function to reproduce and display inside, and a function to make it possible to repeatedly display and stop the production each time the image save button 23 is operated while the production is reproduced. Each time the image save button 23 is operated while the effect is being reproduced, the effect may be configured not to have a function of repeatedly displaying and stopping the effect. Even in this configuration, the effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced later, so that the player can view the desired effect or shoot with the mobile phone terminal.

  In the above embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated again while the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. However, if the image save button 23 is operated again while the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced, the reproduced effect is reproduced from the beginning. You may comprise so that it may reproduce again based on data (1st reproduction | regeneration return means). In this configuration, when the player operates the image storage button 23 while the effect is being reproduced, the effect (image) desired to be visually recognized or shot with the mobile phone terminal is reproduced again from the beginning. Therefore, even if the player misses an effect that he or she wants to view or shoot with a mobile phone terminal, the player can operate the image save button 23 again while the effect is being reproduced, thereby shooting the image with the visual or mobile phone terminal. Can give an opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to surely view or photograph the mobile phone terminal with an effect that the player desires to view or capture with the mobile phone terminal.

  Further, while the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced, the image save button 23 is operated while the effect that has been reproduced is stopped and displayed. When the operation 23 is operated, the effect is reproduced from the time when the stop is displayed. However, when the image saving button 23 is operated while the effect being reproduced is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to reproduce the reproduced effect from the beginning based on the reproduction data (second reproduction returning means). In this configuration, when an effect that is reproduced by the player operating the image storage button 23 is stopped and displayed, the stopped and displayed image is not an image that the player desires due to the operation delay of the player. Even in this case, since the effect is reproduced again from the beginning, it is possible to give the player the opportunity to view or photograph the desired image with the mobile phone terminal again.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 includes the fluctuation time information and the first hit type counter C2 information (that is, whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). However, such a variation pattern command may be configured as a command that does not include information on the first hit type counter C2 but includes only information on the variation time. When the variation pattern command is configured as a command including only the variation time information, the sound lamp control device 113 normally has a jackpot mode based on the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110. Or whether it is a probable jackpot.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown.

  A main control means for performing main control of the game, and a display device for displaying a plurality of effects based on instructions from the main control means, and dynamic display of identification information as one of the effects is performed on the display device. In the gaming machine to be performed, if the operating means operated by the player and the operation means is operated while the presentation is being performed on the display device, the presentation according to the presentation displayed on the display device Based on the effect storage means in which information is stored and the effect information stored in the effect storage means, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is changed to the dynamic of the identification information. A gaming machine 1 comprising reproduction means for reproducing and displaying during an effect other than display.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when an operation means is operated by a player while an effect is being performed on the display device, effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device is stored in the effect storage means. Then, based on the stored production information, the production displayed on the display device when the operation device is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction device during the production other than the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed on the display device, the player can operate the operation means to display the rare effect later, so that the player can surely see the rare effect. It is also possible to shoot with certainty because there is room to prepare a mobile phone terminal.

  Also, here, if the effect displayed on the display device when the player operates the operating means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the reproduced effect is It is unclear whether it is an effect for the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine 1, since the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the reliability of the direct display effect from being lowered.

  In the gaming machine 1, in the effect storage means, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation means is operated while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. A gaming machine 2 characterized in that information is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 2, when the player operates the operating means while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device, the effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is stored in the effect. Since it is stored in the means, the effect displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information can be reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, since the player can operate the operation means, the dynamic display effect of the identification information when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player operates the operation means, and the rare effect is displayed later. The production can be seen with certainty, and there is room to prepare a mobile phone terminal, so that it is possible to shoot with certainty.

  Further, here, if the effect of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the other identification information, the dynamic information of the current identification information is displayed. It is unclear whether it is an effect on display or an effect of dynamic display of identification information when the player operates the operating means. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine 2, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means at the time other than the dynamic display of the identification information. It is not clear whether the effect of the target display is the effect for the dynamic display of the identification information this time or the effect of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means. It is possible to prevent the reliability of the target display from being lowered.

  In the gaming machine 2, when a stop result of the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the gaming machine 2 includes a transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, The reproduction unit reproduces and displays the effect displayed on the display device when the operation unit is operated when the special game state is entered. .

  According to the gaming machine 3, when the result of stopping the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the transition is made to the special gaming state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, and the special game When the state shifts to the state, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means. Therefore, the player continues the game while expecting a transition to the special gaming state in order to visually recognize or capture the effect when the operation means is operated, so that the player operates the operation means. In this case, it is possible to provide a game that can suppress a decrease in interest in a game, while providing a game that can visually recognize or capture an effect of dynamic display of identification information.

  The gaming machine 3 includes operation valid means for validating the operation of the operation means while the identification information is dynamically displayed when the stop result is a combination of predetermined identification information. A gaming machine 4 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the operation means is activated by the operation valid means while the identification information is dynamically displayed when the stop result is a combination of predetermined identification information. In the special game state that is shifted to after the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped when the is operated, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means.

  Here, even if the player operates the operation means and the effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is stored in the effect storage means, the identification information is dynamically changed several times (for example, hundreds of times) thereafter. When the display is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to determine at which timing the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation means is operated. Therefore, the player continues the game while expecting a transition to the special game state, but even when the player transitions to the special game state, it is difficult to know at what timing the dynamic display of the identification information is operated. Therefore, there is a possibility that the willingness to operate the operating means will be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in the special game state that is shifted to after the dynamic display of the identification information operated by the operating means is stopped, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated immediately is reproduced. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be suppressed from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine 3 or 4, the effect storage means is provided with an upper limit on the number of the effect information stored, and the special gaming state is such that a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times. The reproduction means reproduces and displays an effect based on one effect information for one round in the special gaming state, and the upper limit number of the effect information stored in the effect storage means Is configured to be less than the predetermined number of rounds.

  According to the gaming machine 5, an effect based on one effect information is reproduced by the reproducing means for one round in the special gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of effect information stored in the effect storing means is more special. It is configured to be less than a predetermined number of rounds performed in the gaming state. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information based on the effect information operated by the player and stored in the effect storage means can be displayed in the special game state.

  For example, if the dynamic display of the identification information based on the effect information operated by the player and stored in the effect storage means is not displayed in the special game state, the dynamic of the identification information when the operator operates In order to view the display or take a picture with a mobile phone terminal, the game must be continued until the next special game state is entered. Therefore, the player continues the game while expecting the transition to the next special gaming state, but the dynamic of the identification information multiple times (for example, hundreds of times) until the transition to the next special gaming state. Display may be performed. In other words, even if the player operates the operation means, it is unclear when the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation means is operated can be visually recognized or captured by the mobile phone terminal. May be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 5, all the dynamic display of the identification information based on the effect information operated by the player and stored in the effect storage means is displayed in the special game state. Therefore, since the dynamic display of the identification information when operated by the player is always reproduced in the special game state that first shifts after the operation of the operation means, the player's willingness to operate the operation means is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine 5, the reproduction means reproduces and displays an effect based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means in the first half of the rounds that are performed a predetermined number of times in the special gaming state. A gaming machine 6 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the reproduction means reproduces and displays the effect based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means in the first half of the rounds that are performed a predetermined number of times in the special gaming state. In the second round, the production based on the production information stored in the production storage means is not reproduced and displayed.

  Generally, the player has a sense of expectation in the gaming state after the special gaming state is finished. That is, the player continues the game in the special game state while expecting that the game state is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends. Therefore, in the special game state round, the player's interest in the game can be increased by performing a suggestion effect that suggests a game state to be transferred after the special game state is ended. In particular, the player is discouraged when there is a high possibility that the player will enter a gaming state that is not advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state, but if the suggestion effect is performed in the latter half round of the special gaming state, the player is advantageous. You can expect to move to a new gaming state. That is, when the suggestion effect is performed in the special game state, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game in the special game state by performing the latter half round.

  According to the gaming machine 6, since the stage based on the stage information stored in the stage storage means is not reproduced and displayed in the second half of the special gaming state, It is also possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests a gaming state that transitions after the gaming state ends. In other words, the player can expect to enter a gaming state advantageous to the player after the special gaming state is finished in the second half round of the special gaming state, so that the player operates in the first half round of the special gaming state. Expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in the second half round of the special gaming state while providing a gameability that allows visual recognition or shooting with a mobile phone terminal of the dynamic display of identification information when the means is operated It is possible to provide a game that can give a feeling.

  Any one of the gaming machines 3 to 6, further comprising a first memory deleting means for deleting the effect information stored in the effect storage means at the end of the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine 7, at the end of the special gaming state, the production information stored in the production storage means is deleted by the first memory deletion means, so when the transition to the next special gaming state is made, Reproduction of the dynamic display effect of the identification information displayed in the gaming state can be reliably prevented. Therefore, since the dynamic display effect of the identification information displayed in the previous special game state is not displayed in the current special game state, the dynamic display effect of the already-identified identification information is repeated. There is nothing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to repeated presentation of the dynamic display of the recognized identification information.

  Moreover, although the 1st memory | storage deletion means shall delete the effect information memorize | stored in an effect memory | storage means at the time of completion | finish of a special game state, dynamic of the identification information based on the effect information memorize | stored in an effect memory | storage means is carried out. The production information stored in the production storage means may be deleted between the time when the reproduction of the production of the display is completed and the end of the special game state. Even in this configuration, since the dynamic display of the recognized identification information is not repeated many times, it is possible to suppress discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine 2, when the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed on the display device is a predetermined period or longer, the gaming machine 2 includes a standby effect execution unit that performs a standby effect as one of the effects, The reproduction unit reproduces and displays the effect displayed on the display device when the operation unit is operated while the standby effect is being performed by the standby effect executing unit. A gaming machine 8 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 8, when the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed on the display device is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the standby effect is performed by the standby effect executing means as one of the effects. While the effect is being performed, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means. Accordingly, the player intentionally prevents the identification information from being dynamically displayed (for example, if the game is interrupted for a predetermined period), and is displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated. Since the effect (for example, the effect of dynamic display of identification information) is reproduced and displayed, the effect can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal according to the player's will.

  In the gaming machine 8, the effect storage means has an upper limit on the number of the effect information stored, and the reproduction means is stored in the effect storage means when the standby effect is performed. The gaming machine 9 is characterized in that effects corresponding to the number of effects information are reproduced and displayed at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine 9, the effect storage means has an upper limit on the number of pieces of effect information stored, and the reproduction means stores the effect information stored in the effect storage means when the standby effect is performed. Since the effects for several minutes are reproduced and displayed at predetermined intervals, the player can view all the effects when operating the operation means by continuing the state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not performed. You can shoot with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the gaming machine 8 or 9, a winning opening for a game medium, a detecting means for detecting a winning of the gaming medium to the winning opening, and the standby effect being performed, When the winning of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the standby effect is ended, and start means for starting dynamic display of the identification information, and dynamic display of the identification information is started by the start means. A gaming machine 10 comprising: a second memory deleting unit that deletes the effect information stored in the effect storage unit before the game is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 10, when the detection means detects the winning of the game medium at the winning opening, the stand-by effect is ended, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the starting means. Before the display is started, the production information stored in the production storage unit is deleted by the second storage deletion unit. Therefore, the dynamic display effect of the identification information displayed in the previous standby effect is not displayed in the current standby effect. Will not be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to repeated presentation of the dynamic display of the recognized identification information.

  The deletion of the production information by the second storage deletion unit may be performed when the standby production is finished and the dynamic display of the identification information is started, or in the production information stored in the production storage unit. You may perform when the display of reproduction of the production based on all ends. Even if the production information stored in the production storage means is deleted at any timing, the production information is not stored in the production storage means. It is not repeated and it can suppress giving an unpleasant feeling to a player.

  In any one of the gaming machines 2 to 10, a sub-control unit that is interposed between the main control unit and the display device and controls a plurality of effects displayed on the display device based on an instruction from the main control unit. The main control means transmits to the sub control means form information indicating a form of dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display device, and the sub control means , When the operation means is operated, the acquisition means for acquiring the progress information indicating the time elapsed from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the effect storage means is provided in the sub-control means, The gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the form information transmitted from the main control means and the progress information acquired by the acquisition means are stored as the effect information.

  According to the gaming machine 11, progress information indicating the elapsed time from the start of dynamic display of identification information when the operation means is operated is acquired by the acquisition means, and the progress information acquired by the acquisition means and the main control Information transmitted from the means to the sub-control means and indicating the dynamic display form of the identification information displayed on the display device is stored as effect information when the player operates the operation means Stored in the means. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store a large amount of information like image information for displaying a dynamic display of identification information on the screen of the display device, it is not necessary to provide a large storage capacity for the effect storage means, and the device cost. Can be reduced.

  Examples of the form information transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means include time information indicating the time when the identification information is dynamically displayed, stop information indicating the stop result of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the like. Is done. In this configuration, the sub-control means sets the dynamic display mode (for example, lose, reach, super reach, notice effect, etc.) from the time information, and displays the display device so that the display is performed in the set mode. To output instructions.

  In the gaming machine 11, based on the image storage means for storing image information for displaying the dynamic display of the identification information on the screen of the display device, and the image information stored in the image storage means, the identification A dynamic display unit that creates a screen unit image according to a change in the dynamic display of information, displays the created screen unit image continuously, and performs dynamic display; and the acquisition unit includes: The gaming machine 12 is characterized in that the number of images created per screen is acquired as the progress information.

  According to the gaming machine 12, the image information for displaying the dynamic display of the identification information on the screen of the display device is stored in the image storage means, and the identification is performed based on the image information stored in the image storage means. A screen unit image corresponding to a change in the dynamic display of information is created, and the created image unit image is continuously displayed by the dynamic display means for dynamic display. And since the acquisition means can acquire progress information by acquiring the number of images created for each screen that is created to dynamically display the identification information on the display device, the operation means is operated. The time when the dynamic display of the identification information at the time has elapsed can be accurately acquired.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the result of stopping the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the gaming machine 1 includes a transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, The effect storage means stores effect information corresponding to the effect in the special game state when the operation means is operated while the effect in the special game state is being performed on the display device. Characteristic gaming machine 13.

  According to the gaming machine 13, when the result of stopping the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the transition is made to the special game state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, and the special game When the operating means is operated while the state effect is being performed on the display device, effect information corresponding to the special game state effect displayed on the display device is stored in the effect storage means. Therefore, since the effects in the special game state can be reproduced and displayed later, if a rare effect is displayed in the special game state, the player can operate the operation means to display the rare effect later. Is done. Therefore, the player can surely see a rare performance, and can prepare a mobile phone terminal and take a picture with certainty.

  In addition, rare effects during the special gaming state are displayed according to the number of consecutive times when the special gaming state is entered again before the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times after the special gaming state ends (for example, in a short time). It may be displayed, or may be displayed in accordance with the number of consecutive times when the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, during probability change) after the special game state ends. In addition, a rare effect may be displayed according to the number of combinations of the number of transitions to the special gaming state during the short time and the continuous number of times during the probability change. According to these configurations, as the transition to the special gaming state continues, the possibility that a rare presentation will be displayed during the special gaming state increases, so the player's expectation that the special gaming state will continue is increased. In addition, it is possible to increase the willingness to view the rare effects or to take pictures with the mobile phone terminal.

  In the gaming machine 13, the reproduction means operates the special gaming state effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means. A gaming machine 14 which is reproduced and displayed during a special gaming state when the means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine 14, when the operation means is operated, the special gaming state effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means. It is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means during the special game state. Therefore, the effect of the player operating the operating means during the special game state can be reproduced and displayed during the special game state. Here, in a general gaming machine, the number of times of transition to the special gaming state is extremely small compared to the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information, so the player can operate the operation means until the transition to the next special gaming state. If the effect of the special gaming state when operated is not reproduced, the player's willingness to operate the operating means may be reduced. According to the gaming machine 14, since the effect of the player operating the operating means during the special gaming state can be reproduced and displayed during the special gaming state, the player's willingness to operate the operating means is prevented from being reduced. it can.

  In the gaming machine 13 or 14, the special game state is such that a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and the reproduction means uses one effect information for one round in the special game state. A game machine that reproduces and displays an effect based on it, and reproduces and displays an effect based on the effect information in the second half of the rounds performed a predetermined number of times. 15.

  According to the gaming machine 15, in the special gaming state, a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and an effect based on one effect information is reproduced for one round in the special game state. Is reproduced and displayed. The reproduction means reproduces and displays an effect based on one effect information in the second half of the rounds performed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, the reproduction of the production when the player operates the operation means during the special game state is reproduced in the second half round of the special game state, so a rare production etc. is displayed using the first half part of the special game state can do. If the production is reproduced in the first half of the special game state, the number of rounds that can be used for rare productions will be reduced, so the number of rare display modes (variations) that can be performed during the special game state will be reduced. There is a possibility that the gameability with respect to the special gaming state will be lowered. According to the gaming machine 15, since the first half of the rounds in the special gaming state can be used for rare effects, the number of rounds in which the rare effects can be performed during the special gaming state increases, and the game characteristics for the special gaming state effects are increased. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine 13 or 14, the special game state is such that a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and the reproduction means reproduces and displays the effect only in the last round of the special game state. A gaming machine 16 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine 16, in the special gaming state, a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and the effect is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means only in the final round of the special game state. The number of rounds that can be displayed increases. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects in the special game state, and can visually recognize the effects that are rare in the final round or shoot with the mobile phone terminal. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects of the special gaming state and to prevent the game characteristics from being lowered while providing the gameability that allows the player to visually recognize the effect when the operating means is operated or to shoot with the mobile phone terminal.

  In addition, for example, when a player shoots an effect on a mobile phone terminal, if the effect is reproduced in a plurality of rounds in the special gaming state, the player holds the mobile phone terminal during many rounds. It is necessary to concentrate on a game in a special game state. According to the gaming machine 16, since the effects when the player operates the operation means are displayed in a final round in the special gaming state, the player can be concentrated on the game in the special gaming state. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to visually recognize or reproduce the rendition effect with the mobile phone terminal.

  It should be noted that the upper limit of the effect information stored in the effect storage means may be one, and the reproduction of the effect based on the one effect information may be performed in the final round. In this configuration, the number of effects reproduced by the player's operation is reduced, but the upper limit is one that the effect can be reproduced by operating the operating means in the first round of the special gaming state. By suggesting that it will be reproduced in the final round, etc., it is possible to provide a gameability that allows selection of effects to be reproduced over multiple rounds, and to concentrate the player on games in a special gaming state Can do.

  In the gaming machine 15, when the operation means is operated, the game machine 15 includes acquisition means for acquiring progress information indicating a time elapsed from the start of the round, and the effect storage means is used as the effect information by the acquisition means. A gaming machine 17 that stores the acquired progress information and round information indicating a round when the operation means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine 17, when the operation means is operated, the progress information indicating the time elapsed since the start of the round is acquired by the acquisition means, and the acquired progress information and the operation means are operated. Round information indicating this round is stored in the effect storage means as effect information. Therefore, there is no need to store a large amount of information like the image information for displaying the effects of each round in the special gaming state on the screen of the display device, so there is no need to provide a large storage capacity for the effect storage means. The cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 17, on the basis of the image storage means for storing image information for displaying the effect of the special gaming state on the screen of the display device, and the image information stored in the image storage means. A screen display unit configured to create a screen unit image according to a change in the production, and display the created screen unit image continuously to perform the round production unit, and the acquisition unit includes the screen unit image. A gaming machine 18 characterized in that the number of created images is acquired as the progress information.

  According to the gaming machine 18, the image information for displaying the special gaming state effect on the screen of the display device is stored in the image storage means, and the special game is based on the image information stored in the image storage means. A screen unit image corresponding to a change in the state round effect is created, and the created image unit image is continuously displayed by the round display means to perform the round effect. And since the acquisition means can acquire progress information by acquiring the number of images created for each screen that is created in order to produce a round effect on the display device, the acquisition means at the time when the operation means is operated. The time when the round performance has passed can be acquired accurately.

  In any one of the gaming machines 16 to 18, the game machine includes an information number storage means for storing the number of effect information stored in the effect storage means, and the reproduction means stores the effect information stored in the information number storage means. When the number is singular, the effect is reproduced and displayed in the final round of the special gaming state, and when the number of pieces of effect information stored in the information number storage means is plural, According to the number of pieces of effect information stored in the information number storage means, the game includes the final round and reproduces and displays the effect in a round that is continuous before the final round. Machine 19.

  According to the gaming machine 19, when the number of pieces of production information stored in the production storage means is stored in the information number storage means, and the number of pieces of production information stored in the information number storage means is singular, If the replay means reproduces and displays the effects in the last round of the special gaming state, and the number of pieces of effect information stored in the information number storage means includes a final round according to the number of the effect information The effect is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means in rounds that are continued before the final round. Therefore, the reproduction of the production by the reproduction means is performed in the last round among the rounds in the special gaming state or in the latter half of the rounds including the final round, so it is possible to display rare presentations in all the rounds in the special gaming state Increase the number of rounds. In other words, the player can view the rare effects that are reproduced in the last round or subsequent rounds including the final round or shoot with the mobile phone terminal while visually recognizing the effects in the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which an effect when the player operates the operation means can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal while suppressing a decrease in the game property with respect to the effect in the special game state.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 19, the operation unit is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit. And a stop means for stopping and displaying the reproduced display.

  According to the gaming machine 20, when the operation means is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation means is operated by the reproduction means, the reproduced display is displayed. Is stopped and displayed by the stopping means. Therefore, the player can operate the operation means while the effect is being reproduced by the reproduction means, so that the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, or can be viewed or photographed with the mobile phone terminal. Accordingly, among the effects that are reproduced, the display mode desired by the player to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal can be stopped and displayed, so the display mode desired by the player can be viewed or shot with the mobile phone terminal. Possible playability can be provided.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 19, the operation unit is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit. And a first reproduction return unit that reproduces and displays the effect displayed on the display device when the operation unit is operated from the beginning by the reproduction unit. Machine 21.

  According to the gaming machine 21, when the operation means is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation means is operated by the reproduction means, the first reproduction return means Thus, when the operation means is operated, the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed again from the beginning by the reproduction means. Therefore, the player can reproduce the effect that he / she wants to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal again from the beginning by operating the operation means while the effect is reproduced by the reproduction means. Therefore, even if the player misses an effect that he or she wants to view or take a picture with a mobile phone terminal, by operating the operation means, it is possible to provide a game that gives an opportunity to view or take a picture again with the mobile phone terminal. .

  In the gaming machine 20, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, an adjustment unit that moves the elapsed time back and forth with reference to the elapsed time of the reproduction effect that is stopped and displayed, A gaming machine (22), comprising: a forward / backward stop display means for causing the display device to stop and display an effect according to the elapsed time changed by the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine 22, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, the elapsed time based on the elapsed time of the stop-displayed effect is changed by the adjustment unit, and the time is changed. An effect corresponding to the elapsed time is displayed on the display device by the front and rear display means. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means to stop and display the effect that is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means, for example, the player's operation is delayed so that the player can view or take a picture with the mobile phone terminal. Even if the desired display is not stopped, it is possible to adjust the display to be stopped by adjusting the elapsed time by the adjusting means, so that the player can visually check the desired display or can take a picture with a mobile phone terminal. Can be provided.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 22, when the operation unit is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, the reproduction of the effect is resumed by the reproduction unit when the operation unit is operated. A gaming machine 23 comprising a restarting means for causing the game machine 23 to restart.

  According to the gaming machine 23, when the operation means is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the reproduction means reproduces the effect from the display at the time when the stop display is performed by the resumption means. Since the display is resumed, even if there are a plurality of displays that the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal during the reproduction of one, the player can operate the operation means a plurality of times to operate the desired multiple Can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gameability in which a plurality of displays desired by the player can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 22, when the operation unit is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, an effect including the stopped display is first displayed by the reproduction unit. A game machine 24, comprising second reproduction returning means for reproducing and displaying the data again.

  According to the gaming machine 24, when the operation means is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the second reproduction return means displays on the display device when the operation means is operated. The effect that has been performed is reproduced and displayed again from the beginning by the reproduction means. Therefore, even if the operation means is operated and the effect is stopped and displayed while the reproduction means is being reproduced, the operation of the operation means is delayed, and the effect desired by the player cannot be stopped and displayed. By operating the operating means, it is possible to provide a game that gives an opportunity to stop and display the desired display again.

  In any of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the operation of the operation unit is effective while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit. A gaming machine 25 comprising a suggestion means for suggesting that there is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine 25, the suggestion means suggests that the operation of the operation means is effective while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation means is operated by the reproduction means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reproduced performance can be stopped or reproduced again from the beginning.

  In particular, since the operation means is operated when the player wants to reproduce an effect that the player wants to visually recognize or shoot with the mobile phone terminal later, the player recognizes that the operation means can be operated during the reproduction of the effect. Although it becomes painful, it can be suggested that the operating means can be operated by the suggesting means, which is effective for improving game playability.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 25, the reproduction means is based on the operation of the operation means when the production information is stored in the production storage means, and before the reference and for a certain period from the reference. The gaming machine 26 is characterized in that an effect during a period corresponding to is reproduced and displayed based on effect information stored in the effect storage means.

  According to the gaming machine 26, the reproduction means is based on the operation information when the production information is stored in the production storage means based on the production information stored in the production storage means. Since the effect of the period before the reference and a certain period of time elapses is reproduced and displayed, the effect is given before the time when the player operates the operation means (dynamic display of identification information, special game state effect, etc.) Can be reproduced.

  For example, even if a player tries to operate the operation means for later viewing or shooting with a mobile phone terminal for a rare presentation performed on a display device, the player will find that the rare presentation ends in a short time. Even if the operating means is operated in a hurry, there is a possibility that the rare performance has already ended. Therefore, when the effect from the operation start time of the operation means is reproduced by the reproduction means, the effect that the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal may not be reproduced.

  According to the gaming machine 26, the reproduction means can reproduce the effect from before the time when the player operated the operation means, so that the rare effect is performed in a short time and the operation of the player's operation means is not in time. But that rare production can be reproduced later. Therefore, the player can visually recognize or photograph a rare effect when the operation means is operated with the mobile phone terminal.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 25, the reproduction means stores an effect during a period in which the operation means has been operated when the effect information is stored in the effect storage means, in the effect storage means. A gaming machine 27 that is reproduced and displayed based on information.

  According to the gaming machine 27, the reproduction means reproduces the effect during the period in which the operation means was operated when the effect information was stored in the effect storage means, based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means. Of the effects performed on the display device when the operating means is operated, the effects corresponding to the part operated by the player can be reproduced and displayed later. Therefore, since it is possible to reproduce and display the effect of only the part operated by the player considering that it is necessary, it is possible to prevent the effect that the player considers unnecessary from being displayed later.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 27 includes auxiliary effect means for performing an auxiliary effect corresponding to the effect performed on the display device, and the reproduction means also reproduces the effect of the auxiliary effect means. A gaming machine 28.

  According to the gaming machine 28, the reproduction means also reproduces the effect of the auxiliary effect means that performs the auxiliary effect according to the effect performed on the display device, so that the overall effect when the player operates the operation means is later displayed. It can be taken by visual recognition or by a mobile phone terminal.

  In addition, as an auxiliary effect means, a lamp that operates in conjunction with a dynamic display of identification information and a special game state effect, a lamp that lights up in conjunction with a dynamic display of identification information and a special game state effect, Examples include a speaker that outputs sound in conjunction with dynamic display of identification information and effects of a special gaming state.

  Any of the gaming machines 1 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  The gaming machine 30 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
23 Symbol save button (operation means)
64 winning opening 81 3rd symbol display device (display device)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (sub control means)
114 Display control device (sub control means)
226 Audio output device (auxiliary effect means)
227 Lamp display device (auxiliary effect means)
233h Image storage area (storage means)
233j Reproduction stop flag (part of stop means, part of restart means)
S205 Part of transfer means S306 Part of start means S3018 Part of first storage deletion means S3023 Part of acquisition means (elapsed time of dynamic display of identification information)
S3206, S4001 part of operation valid means S3211 part of dynamic display means S3306 part of suggestion means S3308 to S3312 part of reproduction means S3310: part of stop means S3310: part of resumption means S3312 dynamic Part of display means S4103 Part of memory deletion means, part of second memory deletion means S4108 Part of dynamic display means S4602, S4605 Part of adjustment means S5002 Part of acquisition means (progress of special gaming state time)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

  Conventionally, identification information (for example, a symbol) is dynamically displayed on a screen of a display device having a liquid crystal screen or the like, and when the dynamic display is stopped, the identification information has a predetermined combination (for example, “7”). There are known gaming machines (such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) that shift to a special gaming state (for example, jackpot) that gives an advantageous gaming value to a player when the symbols are stopped in a line.

In the recent years of the gaming machine, at the start of a dynamic display of the identification information, or made a rare suggestion performance (such as the premium presentation effects) to have the expectations of the transition to subsequent special game state, the identification information dynamic display of In the middle of the game, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the dynamic display of the identification information and reducing the game performance by performing a rare presentation different from normal (see Patent Document 1). .

JP 2000-342784 A

As described above, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, by performing the rare effect on the dynamic display of the starts or during the identification information and causes prevent the Yu technique is lowered, the identification information In the dynamic display, since the display mode changes as the dynamic display progresses, even if a rare effect is displayed, the effect may be missed.

In addition, even if an attempt is taking a scarce production, it will be finished rare performance prior to the shooting, there is a problem in that it may be difficult to leave as a photograph.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reliably viewing or photographing a rare effect performed on a display device.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control unit that performs main control of a game, and a display device that displays a plurality of effects based on instructions of the main control unit, As one of the effects, dynamic display of identification information is performed on the display device, and an operation means operated by a player and for storing the effect while the effect is being performed on the display device When the operation is performed on the operation means , effect storage means for storing effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device is provided, and the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. The effect storage means for storing the effect information according to the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation for storing the effect is performed while the effect information is stored in the effect storage means based on, store the presentation The effect of operation has been displayed on the display device when made for a reproduction means for displaying reproduced during presentation of the non-dynamic display of the identification information, dynamic display of stop of the identification information When the result is a combination of predetermined identification information, a transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that gives an advantageous gaming value to the player, and an effect of the special gaming state is performed on the display device. An acquisition means for acquiring progress information indicating a time elapsed from the start of a running round among a predetermined number of rounds performed in the special gaming state when an operation for storing the effect is performed in the meantime with the door, the said presentation storage means, the special game-like when the operation for the storing the effect while the effect of the special game state is performed in the display device is performed As the production information according to the production, the progress information acquired by the acquisition unit and the round information indicating the round when the operation unit is operated are stored, and the gaming machine further includes the reproduction unit. When the operation means is operated to stop and display the reproduced display while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation means is operated. In addition, when the reproduction means by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the stop means for stopping and displaying the reproduced display, and the elapsed time of the reproduction being reproduced and displayed as a reference. Adjusting means for moving the elapsed time forward and backward, and a front and back stop display means for causing the display device to stop display the effect according to the elapsed time changed by the adjusting means .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the game machine includes a main control unit that performs main control of the game, and a display device that displays a plurality of effects based on instructions from the main control unit. Is displayed on the display device, and the operation means operated by the player and the operation for storing the effect while the effect is being performed on the display device are performed on the operation means. In the case where the display information is displayed, the effect storage means stores effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device, and the effect is displayed while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. Effect storage means for storing effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information when an operation for storing is performed, and storing the effect based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means Operation is performed A reproduction unit that reproduces and displays the effect displayed on the display device at the time of the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information, and the result of stopping the dynamic display of the identification information Transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that gives a game value advantageous to the player when combined, and for storing the effect while the special gaming state effect is being performed on the display device And an acquisition means for acquiring progress information indicating a time elapsed from the start of the currently executed round among the predetermined number of rounds performed in the special gaming state when the operation is performed. In the display device, when the operation for storing the effect is performed while the effect of the special gaming state is performed on the display device, the effect information according to the effect of the special gaming state Then, the progress information acquired by the acquisition unit and the round information indicating the round when the operation unit is operated are stored. In the gaming machine, the operation unit is further operated by the reproduction unit. If the operation for stopping and displaying the reproduced display is performed on the operation means while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed, the reproduction is reproduced. Stop means for stopping the displayed display, and when the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the elapsed time is about Adjustment means, and a front / rear stop display means for stopping and displaying an effect according to the elapsed time before and after the adjustment means on the display device. There is an effect that a rare performance to be performed can be surely seen or photographed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual screen and effective line setting in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the symbol change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot presentation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which shows the change of the production | presentation of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, and the change of a state. It is the flowchart which showed the change production process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration screen effect process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button input monitoring and presentation process performed with MPU of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot presentation process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in jackpot presentation. It is the flowchart which showed the external interruption process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the change production process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot presentation process performed with MPU of the display control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17.

  The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 and an image storage button 23 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  Further, the image save button 23 provides an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (such as a premium effect displayed during symbol variation display (dynamic display of identification information) or jackpot (special game state)). When saving, when the saved effect is reproduced and displayed, and when the effect (image) is stopped and displayed, the player is operated when the stopped and displayed effect is restarted and displayed. . When the image save button 23 is operated and the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is saved, the saved effect is reproduced and displayed during a subsequent big hit round. When the image save button 23 is operated while the saved effect is being reproduced, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed when the image save button 23 is operated again. The effect is resumed and displayed. That is, the premier effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is reproduced and displayed during the big hit round, and the reproduced premier effect etc. can be stopped and displayed on the way, so that the player can afford You can see the premiere effect and you can shoot the premier effect on your mobile phone.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the lending operation unit 40 is operated with a bill or a card inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, lending of balls according to the operation Is done.

  Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance.

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14 c of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Furthermore, during the probability change in this embodiment, the game is in a state where the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running, it means a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). . In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per time are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. For example, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The symbol “○” and “x” in FIG. 1 are alternately lit to display a variation, and the variation display is stopped when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “◯”). The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it carry out using a part of. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (detection means, a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4)) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the turning on of the 1 entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. Can be visually recognized through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. A round counter 203 a is provided in the work area of the RAM 203. This round counter 203a is a counter that stores the number of rounds (1 to 16 in this embodiment) that is a big hit, and a value 1 is added every time the round advances in the big hit processing of FIG. 13 (S708), A value 0 (initial value) is set at the end of the jackpot (S712).

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 8), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a holding lamp 84, and various switches including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown). 208, a solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid is excited, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the image storage lamp 23a), The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 performed by the display control apparatus 114 is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 223 is provided with a fluctuation start flag 223a and an image storage lamp lighting flag 223b. The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag for determining whether or not to start the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2208 in FIG. 17). When the setting of the display mode of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is started, the display is turned off (see S2303 in FIG. 18). The image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is a flag for determining whether or not to turn on the image storage lamp 23a, and is turned on when an image storage lamp lighting command is received from the display control device 114 (see S2208 in FIG. 17). When the image storage lamp turn-off command is received from the display control device 114, it is turned off (see S2209 in FIG. 17).

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When a command determination process (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, is executed, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, the first stored command is read, and the read command is analyzed. The process according to the command is performed.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226 that outputs sound from a speaker (not shown), and a lamp display device 227 that performs lamp display using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. In addition, a frame button 22, an image save button 23, an image save lamp 23a, and the like are connected to each other.

  The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and includes a variable time counter (not shown).

  Here, the variation time counter (not shown) is a counter that measures the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) since the variation effect was started when the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This variation time counter is reset to zero immediately before the variation effect is started in the variation effect process (see FIG. 22) executed every 20 milliseconds (see S1404 in FIG. 23), and the third symbol display device 81. While the changing effect is being performed, it is updated by adding 1 each time the changing effect process is executed (see S3208 in FIG. 22). That is, the variation time counter counts 20 milliseconds as one count. In the variation effect process, variation effect data or continuous notice effect data corresponding to the value of the variation time counter is read from the video RAM 234 described later, and an image corresponding to the effect data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the work RAM 233 includes a production permission flag 233a, a change start flag 233b, a demonstration execution flag 233c, a symbol stop flag 233d, a round counter 233e, a big hit middle flag 233f, an image storage counter 233g, an image storage area 233h, an effective flag 233i, and A reproduction stop flag 233j is provided.

  The effect permission flag 233a is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of various effects performed in the third symbol display device 81 is permitted, and an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is an audio lamp. When it is received via the control device 113, it is turned on (see S3009 in FIG. 20), and the on state is continued until the power is shut off.

  The variation start flag 233b is turned on when a variation pattern command for display instructing a variation effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 or a mode of continuous notice effect is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3010 in FIG. 20). ), It is turned off when the variable display is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see S3203 in FIG. 22).

  The demonstration execution flag 233c is a flag for determining whether or not to perform a customer waiting effect (standby effect, hereinafter referred to as “demonstration effect”) in the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81. Is turned on when a demonstration execution command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received when the variation effect performed in step S3 is not performed for a predetermined time or longer (see S3019 in FIG. 20), and is turned off when the variation effect is resumed. (See S3012 in FIG. 20).

  The symbol stop flag 233d is a flag indicating whether or not to stop the variable display of the symbol sequence performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a stop command transmitted from the main control device 110 is sent via the voice lamp control device 113. Turned on (see S3014 in FIG. 20) and turned off when all symbols are stopped (see S3213 in FIG. 22).

  The round counter 233e is a counter that stores the number of rounds of the jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, and when the round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a value corresponding to the round number extracted from the round number command is stored (see S3015 in FIG. 20). Specifically, if round 1, value 1 is stored, and if round 16, value 16 is stored.

  The big hit flag 233f is a flag indicating whether or not the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit effect, and a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is sent via the voice lamp control device 113. Turned on (see S3016 in FIG. 20), and turned off when a jackpot end command transmitted from the main control device 113 is received via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S3017 in FIG. 20).

  The image storage counter 233g is a counter indicating the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h. Each time the image storage command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 and the reproduction data is stored in the image storage area 233h. 1 is added (S3024 in FIG. 20), and the initial value (value 0) is stored when the jackpot end command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received via the sound lamp controller 113 (S3018 in FIG. 20). reference).

  The image storage area 233h is an area for storing reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the image storage button 23 is operated by the player. An upper limit is set for the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (in the present embodiment, the upper limit is 5). Therefore, the third symbol display when the player operates the image saving button 23 when the image saving command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of reproduction data stored in the image saving area 233h is less than five. Reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display performed by the device 81 is stored (see S3023 in FIG. 20). If the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is 5 or more, the oldest reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is deleted, and the player of this time presses the image storage button 23. The reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 when operated is newly stored (see S3025 in FIG. 20).

  The valid flag 233i is a flag indicating whether or not the operation of the image saving button 23 is valid. In the present embodiment, a period for validating the operation of the image saving button 23 is determined, and during the valid period, a variable display is performed when the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit. And during reproduction of effects based on reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h in the big hit round. Therefore, when the variable display that is a big hit is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see S3206 in FIG. 22), the reproduction of the effect based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h in the big hit round is performed. Turned on when started (see S3306 in FIG. 23), and when a variable display that is not a big hit is started (see S3207 in FIG. 22), or when a normal presentation is performed in the big hit round (S3303 in FIG. 23) Turned off.

  The reproduction stop flag 233j reproduces the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the image save button 23 is operated by the player based on the reproduction data stored in the image save area 233h. In the meantime, it is a flag for determining whether or not the reproduced effect is to be stopped and whether to reproduce the effect from the stopped display state. Specifically, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is on, the effect that has been reproduced is stopped and displayed, and if the reproduction stop flag 233j is off, the effect that was stopped and displayed is resumed. The reproduction stop flag 233j receives an image saving command corresponding to the image saving button 23 from the sound lamp control device 113, and the image saving button 23 is valid (the effect is reproduced based on the reproduction data during the big hit). On and off are alternately switched (S3027, S3028 in FIG. 20) and turned off at the end of the jackpot (see S3017 in FIG. 20).

  The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data (character information) such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format.

  The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing data for variation effect after decompression (hereinafter referred to as “variation effect data”) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, the video RAM 234 stores the contents of the variation effect data in correspondence with the elapsed time from the start to the end of the variation. As a result, it is possible to extract the variation effect data corresponding to the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) since the variation effect was started.

  The video RAM 234 is provided with a variable effect area (not shown). This region for variation effect (not shown) is a region for storing variation effect data of the variation effect (variation display) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 responds to the variation elapsed time from the variation effect data in the mode indicated in the display variation pattern command stored in the video RAM 234 in advance. The changed effect data is read out and stored in this changed effect area (see S3210 in FIG. 22). The variable effect data stored in the variable effect area is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (see S3211 in FIG. 22). And the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the area | region for fluctuation | variation effect according to fluctuation | variation elapsed time. The video RAM 234 is further provided with a jackpot effect area and a demonstration effect area. In the jackpot effect area and the demonstration effect area, the display contents of the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect are changed by rewriting the contents according to the elapsed time, similarly to the variable effect area.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14), store the information on the occurrence of power interruption in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 8), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Here, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) is executed. And updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit, and in this embodiment, one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, After reaching 4), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the jackpot is “0, 4”, and two types of hits are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The high probability state refers to a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) means a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is based on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reservations), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected so that a jackpot is likely to occur and a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240 and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs.

  Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. .

  As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8).

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting in the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment, The design of the shell). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols corresponding to the odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the jackpot, the variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are scrolled (rightwardly scrolled) from right to left (arrow X direction) with a periodicity for each symbol row. Is displayed in a variable manner.

  In such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has three columns of left / middle / right or upper / middle / lower for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Three symbols are displayed. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in any case during horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  In each game, when the variable display that scrolls horizontally is stopped, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is arranged on any active line, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot. . At this time, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, in this embodiment, a reach effect is performed as one of the effects of the variable display performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The reach effect is an effect in which two of the same symbols are stopped on one of the lines L1 to L5 (in this embodiment, one line or two lines), and one symbol is unconfirmed (being changed). is there. In addition, for reach production, normal reach with low expectation to jackpot (the probability of being selected when transitioning to jackpot is low), super reach with high expectation for jackpot than the normal reach, and end of variable display of symbols There will be a premier reach that will always be a big hit. FIG. 6B is a reach effect in a state in which the same symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed on the lines L4 and L5, and “Swimsuit Man” is illustrated at the center. In the present embodiment, the effect that the man in the swimsuit appears is one of the premier reach.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 7 to 14. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

  First, referring to FIG. 7, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side and the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 11) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of acquired balls to the payout control device 111 A prize ball command corresponding to is sent. Further, by this external output processing (S201), a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, etc. required for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol display device 81). Morphological information indicating the form of the variable display) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, or when a ball is fired, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the jackpot processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 14) has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 8).

  As shown in FIG. 9, in this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the number of the operation holding balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation holding ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first hit type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In this embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is reached after a big hit, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is reached, and a blue LED is turned on when it is out of place. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 9). In this variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401).

  Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “7,307” is a winning value among the values 0 to 699 of the first random number counter C1 when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is normal low probability, and “28, “63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618” are hit values.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ).

  In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to a high probability state after big hit (whether it is a probable big hit) or to shift to a low probability state (whether it is a normal big hit) is set. The When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the transition state after the jackpot.

  That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to a low probability state (normally big hit), and when “0, 4”, , Move to a high probability state (probability big hit).

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. .

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S403, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  After the process of S403 or S405, a variation pattern command is set (S406). In the process of S406, the fluctuation pattern command at the time of jackpot is the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined in the process of S403 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, the normal jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. Or)). In the process of S406, the fluctuation pattern command at the time of deviation is the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined in the process of S405 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (that is, the front / rear deviation reach or other than the front / rear deviation) It is set according to whether it is reach or completely off.

  After the process of S406, a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404 (S407), and then the process returns to the variation process.

  These variation pattern command and stop symbol command are stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are converted into voice lamps in the process of S201 of the main process (see FIG. 8). It is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process (see FIG. 12) associated with winning in the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), a firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor and turns on / off the launch of the ball on the condition that the launch stop switch for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining OFF. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 11).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance pass counter 203b (S602).

  After the process of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number N of activated balls is <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of activated balls is incremented by 1 (S604), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605).

  On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number N of operation reservation balls is not less than 4 (S603: No). , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the jackpot processing (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 8).

  When this jackpot processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S701). If the current jackpot is not being hit (S701: No), the jackpot processing (S205) is terminated as it is. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the present is a big hit (S701: Yes), it is necessary to open and close the specific winning opening 65a. For this reason, when the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S702: Yes) and the specific winning opening 65a is open (S703: Yes), the large winning opening opening solenoid provided in the variable winning apparatus 65 is provided. Is turned on to open the specific winning opening 65a (S704). The opening time of the specific prize opening 65a means that the value of the round counter 203a is “1” or more and that a fixed time has passed since the variable display with the jackpot symbol is confirmed and stopped, or the previous special prize opening 65a This is the time when any one of the conditions that a certain time has passed since closing. On the other hand, when the specific winning opening 65a is being opened (S702: No), or even when the specific winning opening 65a is closed, it is not the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S703: No), the process of S704 is performed. The process skips to S705.

  In the process of S705, a round number command corresponding to the number of rounds stored in the round counter 203a is set (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. The process of S705 is a process of setting a command for informing the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 of what round the jackpot is now. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player in a state where the variation display of the symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect of the variation display of the symbol is reproduced. The reproduction data to be stored is stored in the image storage area 233h. And the reproduction of the presentation based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233a is configured to be able to be displayed between 3 rounds to 7 rounds. Therefore, a round number command indicating the number of rounds that is a big hit is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S706, it is determined whether or not it is the closing time of the specific winning opening 65a (S706). The closing timing of the specific prize opening 65a is a time when a certain time elapses after the specific prize opening 65a is opened or 10 balls are awarded to the specific prize opening 65a. If it is the closing time of the specific winning opening 65a (S706: Yes), the large winning opening releasing solenoid is turned off (S707), 1 is added to the round counter 203a (S708), and the big hit processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the processing of S706 that it is not the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S706: No), it is determined whether the value of the round counter 203a is “15” or less (S709), and “15” or less. If there is (S706: Yes), it is not the last round of jackpot (that is, round 16), so the jackpot processing (S205) is terminated as it is. Also, if the value of the round counter 203a is greater than “15” in the processing of S709 (S709: No), it will be the 16th round, and the closing of the last specific winning opening 65a will be over and the jackpot end effect will be executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the execution time of the end effect has passed (S710).

  In the process of S710, if the execution time of the end effect has not elapsed (S710: No), the jackpot process (S205) is ended as it is, and if the execution time of the end effect has elapsed (S710: Yes), the jackpot Therefore, the jackpot end command is set (S711), the value of the round counter 203a is set to “0 (initial value)”, and the jackpot processing (S205) is ended. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player in a state where the symbol variation display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display effect of the symbol is displayed. Reproduction data for reproducing the image is stored in the image storage area 233h, and the reproduction of the production based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h can be displayed between 3 to 7 rounds Has been. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is deleted in order to prevent the effect of changing the display of the same symbol from being reproduced again during the next jackpot. Yes. Therefore, a jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot ends is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 19. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). Included.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S2115 (see FIG. 16) is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2112 in FIG. 16), it executes a power-off process in S2115. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2115 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S2115 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Determination of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2115. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be determined. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the data in the RAM 223 has not been destroyed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004.

  On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2115, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2005: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S2115, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2115 (see S2114 in FIG. 16). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2115 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2115 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 by the process of S2010, the interrupt permission is set and the start-up process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the main process executed after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S2101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), The processing proceeds to S2110 without performing the processing in S2102 to S2109.

  Here, in the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed, S2102 to S2109 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute each counter update process (see S2301 in FIG. 18) and command determination process (see FIG. 17) in S2111 in a short cycle in the decorative symbol variation display process in S2110. By executing the command determination process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2107 described later ( After that, a power-on notification process is executed (S2103).

  The power-on notification process (S2103) is a notification for notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. The notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device. 227. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2104 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2104, a customer waiting effect is executed (S2104). In the customer waiting effect, when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player (specifically, the time when the symbol variation display is not performed) has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), the third symbol display Settings such as switching the display of the device 81 to a title screen (demo screen) are performed, and the settings are transmitted to the display control device 114 as a demonstration execution command. Note that the time that is not played by the player is measured, for example, by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the demonstration execution command transmitted from the main control device 110 one second after the end of the variable display.

  Thereafter, the hold number display update process is executed (S2105), and the button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2106). In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 85 is performed according to the value of a number-of-holds counter (not shown). In the button input monitoring / production process, it is monitored whether the frame button 22 and the image saving button 23 are operated by the player to input an operation. This button input monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2107), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2108). In the lamp editing process (S2107), the setting of the lighting pattern of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the lighting pattern of the image storage lamp 23a are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b. Is set based on The lighting pattern of the image storage lamp 23a is set to light when the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is on, and is turned off when the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is off. In the sound editing / output process (S2108), the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. The

  After the process of S2108, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2107 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2108 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  The process of S2110 is a process of setting the effect form of the change effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81 and transmitting a command instructing the set aspect to the display control device 114. Details of the decorative symbol variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2111). Details of the command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the command determination process (S2111), it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2112). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2112 (S2112: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2114), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2115). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2116), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the storage of information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2112 (S2112: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2113), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2113: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed.

  If the RAM 223 is destroyed as a result of checking in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 16) described above.

  In this command determination process (S2111), first, from the command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control is performed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command is received from the device 110 (S2201).

  If the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2212). After the process of S2212, the fluctuation time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2213), this command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The variation time extracted by the process of S2213 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when a variation effect mode is set in a decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 18) described later.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is determined whether a stop symbol command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2202). If the stop symbol command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2202 (S2202: Yes), the stop symbol from the stop symbol command (usually big hit, probability variable big hit, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out completely) Any) is extracted (S2214), the command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The stop symbol extracted by the process of S2214 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when a stop symbol is set in a decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 18) described later.

  On the other hand, if a stop symbol command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2203). If a stop command is received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display controller 114 (S2211), and the command determination process (S2111) is terminated. Return to the main process.

  If a stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204), and a round number command may be received. If (S2204: Yes), the received round number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2215), the command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the main process returns.

  If a round number command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is next determined whether a jackpot end command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If a jackpot end command has been received from 110 (S2205: Yes), the received jackpot end command is output to the display controller 114 (S2216), and then the command determination process (S2111) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  If the jackpot end command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2205 (S2205: No), whether the image storage lamp lighting command has been received (S2206) and the image storage lamp lighting command has been received. Is discriminated (S2207). If the image storage lamp lighting command has been received in the processing of S2206 (S2206: Yes), the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is turned on (S2208), and the image storage lamp turning-off command has been received in the processing of S2207. If (S2207: Yes), the image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is turned off, and the process proceeds to S2210. The image storage lamp lighting flag 223b is referred to when setting the lighting pattern of the image storage lamp 23a in the lamp editing process (see S2107 in FIG. 16).

  If the image storage lamp turn-on command and the image storage lamp turn-off command are not received in the processes of S2206 and S2207 (S2206: No, S2207: No), the process proceeds to S2210.

  In the process of S2210, a process according to another command is executed (S2210), the command determination process (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As processing according to other commands, processing according to other commands is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, or when the received other commands are commands used by the display control device 114, This is a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) described above.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in this decorative symbol variation display process (S2110), first, various counters (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 (a counter for setting the effect mode of the variation effect, a counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of normal big hit) Then, the updating process of the counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of detachment is executed (S2301).

  After the process of S2301, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2302). In the process of S2302, if the variation start flag is not on (that is, is off) (S2302: No), the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus this decorative symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag 223a is on in the process of S2302 (S2302: Yes), the variation start flag 223a is turned off (S2303), and the variation pattern in the process of S2210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 17). The variation time in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2204).

  After the processing of S2204, based on the variation time acquired by the processing of S2210 and the stop symbol extracted by the processing of S2211, the variation that sets the mode of variation display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 An effect setting process is executed (S2305), and a stop symbol setting process for setting a stop symbol displayed at the end of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2306).

  After execution of the stop symbol setting process (S2306), a display variation pattern command for instructing the variation display effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting processing (S2305) is output to the display control device 114. (S2307), and then a display stop symbol command for indicating the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2306) is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2308). The decorative symbol variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  The display control device 114 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S2307 and S2308.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the button input monitoring / effect process (S2106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) described above.

  When the button input monitoring / effect process (S2106) is executed, it is determined whether the image save button 23 is operated by the player to input the image save button 23 (S2401), and the image save button 23 is input. If it has been made (S2401: Yes), in order to make the display control device 114 recognize that the image storage button 23 has been operated, an image storage command is output to the display control device 114 (S2402). If the image save button 23 is not input in the process of S2401 (S2401: No), the process proceeds to S2403 without executing the process of S2402.

  In the processing of S2403, it is determined whether the player has operated the frame button 22 to input the frame button 22 (S2403). If the input of the frame button 22 has been performed (S2403: Yes), the frame button 22 is determined. An effect corresponding to the operation is set and the set effect command is output to the display control device 114 (S2404). If the frame button 22 is not input in the process of S2403 (S2403: No), the process of S2404 is not executed and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2106) is terminated.

  Note that the processing of S2404 is performed by, for example, pressing the frame button 22 when a notice character appears at the start of variable display, and displaying the expected value of jackpot due to the current variation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have the sense of expectation to a jackpot, or selecting one reach production | generation among several reach productions.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power-on and external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24, an example of the change of the effect of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 controlled by the display control apparatus 114 is demonstrated easily. FIG. 24 is a timing chart showing changes in performance of the third symbol display device 81 and a diagram showing changes in state. Note that the timing chart shown in FIG. 24 is a variation effect at the time of a big hit, and a variation effect of a premium reach where a man in a swimsuit appears as a premier effect.

  As shown in FIG. 24, when the variation effect is started at time t1, the variation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is started. After that, after 2 seconds (hereinafter referred to as “s” in the description of FIG. 24), the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the upper symbol is fixed (time t2), and after 0.5 s, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. The lower symbol is fixed (time t3). After the time t3 when the lower symbol is determined, a reach effect section is set.

  A swimsuit man appears 3s after the start of the reach effect (time t5) (the state shown in FIG. 6B). The player recognizes that it is a premier effect and operates the image saving button 23, and therefore, the image saving button 23 is input 1 s after a man in a swimsuit appears (time t6).

  After that, when the reach effect is continued and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and the middle symbol is confirmed (time t8), for example, the same symbol is stopped on the same line and the jackpot is confirmed. The jackpot presentation starts from time t9, but there is a margin of 3s between time t8 and time t9, and the presentation of re-changing the jackpot symbol is performed during the period of 3s.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player while the variation display of the symbol that shifts to the big hit is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81. The production performed in is reproduced and displayed during the big hit round. The effects that are reproduced during the big hit round are repeatedly reproduced for 10 seconds from the time when the image save button 23 is operated to 8 seconds after the image save button 23 is operated from the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player. Is done. That is, the time loss until the player operates the image saving button 23 is considered. Further, if the player operates the image save button 23 while the effect based on the player's operation of the image save button 23 is reproduced in the big hit round, the reproduced effect is stopped. It is configured to be displayed. Therefore, it is configured so that the player can surely view or photograph the premier effect during the jackpot with the mobile phone terminal. Each process performed by the display control apparatus 114 configured as described above will be described below.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This external interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the external interrupt process is executed with the reception of the command from the sound lamp control device 113, the received command is determined in the processes of S3001 to S3008. Specifically, in the process of S3001, it is determined whether the received command is an effect permission command (S3001). The effect permission command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 at the timing when the start-up process (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 ends. At this time, if the received command is an effect permission command (S3001: Yes), the effect permission flag 233a provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S3009), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a production permission command (S3001: No), it is determined whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S3002). At this time, if the received command is a display variation pattern command (S3002: Yes), the variation start flag 233b provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S3010), and the variation mode (reach) included in the display variation pattern command is determined. The production mode and the off-change production mode are extracted (S3011). Next, since the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is started, the demo screen flag 233c for instructing the demonstration effect is turned off in the third symbol display device 81 (S3012), and the external interruption process is ended. It should be noted that the variation mode extracted by the processing of S3011 is stored in a predetermined area in the work RAM 233 and is referred to in a variation effect process (see FIG. 22) described later.

  If the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S3002: No), it is determined whether the received command is a display stop symbol command (S3003). At this time, if the received command is a display stop symbol command (S3003: Yes), the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is set (S3013), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  If the received command is not a display stop symbol command (S3003: No), it is determined whether the received command is a stop command (S3004). At this time, if the received command is a stop command (S3004: Yes), the symbol stop flag 233d is turned on (S3014) to stop the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3014), and external interrupt processing is performed. finish.

  If the received command is not a stop command (S3004: No), it is determined whether the received command is a round number command (S3005). At this time, if the received command is a round number command (S3005: Yes), the number of big hits is extracted and stored in the round counter 233e of the work RAM 233 (S3015). Thereafter, when the round number command is transmitted from the main control device 110, the game is a big hit game, so the big hit flag 233f is turned on (S3016), and the external interruption process is terminated.

  If the received command is not a round number counter (S3005: No), it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot end command (S3006). At this time, if the received command is a jackpot end command (S3006: Yes), it is the jackpot end timing, so the jackpot middle flag 233f and the reproduction stop flag 233j are turned off (S3017), and then the image storage area 233h is set. The stored reproduction data and the image storage counter 233g are cleared (S3018), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, if the player operates the image storage button 23 while the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the variable display is performed. The medium production (for example, the premier production) is configured to be reproducible during the jackpot round. Therefore, if the premier effect is reproduced during the big hit, the display variation pattern command and the elapsed time stored in the image storage area 233h are initialized to prevent the same effect from being repeated repeatedly at the next big hit. doing.

  If the received command is not a jackpot end command (S3006: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a demonstration execution command (S3007). At this time, if the received command is a demonstration execution command (S3007: Yes), the demonstration execution flag 233c is turned on (S3019) because it is the timing for executing the demonstration effect in the third symbol display device 81. End external interrupt processing.

  If the received command is not a demonstration execution command (S3007: No), it is determined whether the received command is an image storage command (S3008). At this time, if the received command is an image save command (S3008: Yes), next, the player operates the image save button 23, and confirms whether the operation of the image save button 23 is valid. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid flag 233j is on (S3020). In the present embodiment, the image save button 23 is configured to be effective only when the jackpot is shifted to after the end of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is determined in the processing of S3020 whether the validity flag 233j indicating that the operation of the image saving button 23 is valid is on.

  If the operation of the image save button 23 is invalid and the valid flag 233j is off (S3020: No) in the process of S3020, the external interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of S3021 to S3028. On the other hand, if the valid flag 233j is on in the processing of S3020 (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 233f is on (S3021). In the processing of S3021, the big hit flag 233f is discriminated because of the operation of the image saving button 23 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, or the image while the big hit effect is being performed. This is to distinguish whether the save button 23 is operated.

  If the big hit flag 233f is off in the processing of S3021 (S3021: No), the operation of the image saving button 23 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 becomes valid. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the image storage counter 233g is smaller than 5 (S3022). The reason why the value of the image storage counter 233g is confirmed in the processing of S3022 is that, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the storage number of the effect of the variable display when the image storage button 23 is operated is up to five. .

  If the value of the image storage counter 233g is smaller than 5 in the processing of S3022 (S3022: Yes), the display variation pattern command instructing the variation display executed by the third symbol display device 81 at that time, and the variation The elapsed time from the start of the presentation is stored as reproduction data in the image storage area 233h (S3023). Thereafter, since the storage in the image storage area 233h is completed, 1 is added to the value of the image storage counter 233g (S3024), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player and reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored, the image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Instead of data (data for generating an image in units of screens as described above), a display variation pattern command for instructing a display form of variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and a point in time when the image saving button 23 is operated. Information on elapsed time is stored. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the storage capacity of the image storage area 233h as much as when image data is stored, a storage unit having a small maximum storage capacity can be used for the work RAM 233, and the apparatus cost can be reduced. it can.

  In the processing of S3022, if the value of the image storage counter 233g is 5 or more (S3022: No), since the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h has already reached the upper limit, the oldest reproduction data Are deleted, new reproduction data (display variation pattern command and elapsed time) are stored in the image storage area 233h (S3025), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  When the value of the image storage counter 233g is 5 or more (S3022: No), the oldest reproduction data is deleted and new reproduction data is stored, but the value of the image storage counter 233g is 5 If it is above, you may comprise so that new reproduction data may not be memorize | stored.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 233f is on in the processing of S3021 (S3021: Yes), the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled while the jackpot effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S3026). The reproduction stop flag 233j is a flag for determining whether to stop display of the variable display effect (image) reproduced based on the reproduction data during the jackpot or to restart the stop-displayed effect. Each time the save button 23 is operated, on / off is switched. Therefore, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is off (S3026: No), the reproduction stop flag 233j is turned on (S3027). If the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S3026: Yes), the reproduction stop flag 233j is turned off. (S3028), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  If the received command is not an image saving command (S3008: No), that is, the received command is a production permission command, a display variation pattern command, a display stop symbol command, a stop command, a round number command, If none of the jackpot end command, the demonstration execution command, or the image saving command, the processing corresponding to the other received command is executed (S3029), and the external interrupt processing is ended.

  Next, the main process executed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  The main process shown in FIG. 21 is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When the main process is started, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3101). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

  After executing the initial setting process (S3101), the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S3102), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S3103). . Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 is different from the area in the video RAM 234 that stores the character information decompressed in the process of S3103. The extracted character information is written in the area (S3104).

  After the process of S3104, it is determined whether or not the effect permission flag 233a provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S3105). If the production permission flag is OFF in the process of S3105 (S3105: No), the production permission command has not been received from the main control device 110. In this case, until the production permission command is received, that is, Until the effect permission flag 233a is turned on, the processing after S3106 is awaited. If the effect permission flag is turned on in the process of S3105 (S3105: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S3104 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And it transfers to the process after S3106.

  In the process of S3106, it is determined whether or not the demonstration execution flag 233c is on (S3106). If the demonstration execution flag 233c is ON in the process of S3106 (S3106: Yes), the demonstration screen effect process is executed (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111. If the demonstration execution flag 233c is off (S3106: No), it is determined whether the big hit medium flag 233f is on (S3108) because the variation effect process or the big hit effect process is performed.

  In the process of S3108, if the jackpot medium flag 233f is on (S3108: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S3109), and if the jackpot medium flag is off (S3108: No), the variable effect process is performed. (S3110), the process proceeds to S3111. A detailed description of the jackpot effect process (S3109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, and a detailed description of the change effect process (S3110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3111, since the process (S3107, S3109, S3110) for performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 is executed every 20 milliseconds (20 ms), 20 ms or more has elapsed since the process of S3106 was started. It is confirmed whether or not (S3111).

  As a result of checking in the process of S3111, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed (S3111: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more has elapsed, while if 20 ms or more has elapsed (S3111: Yes). The process proceeds to S3106. The processing from S3106 to S3111 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, the above-described variation effect process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this variable display process, first, it is determined whether the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is changing (S3201), and if not changing (S3201: No). Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 233b provided in the work RAM 233 is on (S3202).

  If the variation start flag 233b is turned on in the process of S3202 (S3202: Yes), the variation start flag 233b is turned off (S3203), and a variation time counter (not shown) for measuring the variation time provided in the work RAM 233 is shown. Z) is reset to 0 (S3204), and it is then determined whether or not the current variation start display is a big hit (S3205). The determination of whether the variation display to be started this time is a big hit depends on whether the stop symbol extracted and set from the display stop symbol command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is a hit or miss. Determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S3205 that the fluctuation display to be started this time is a big hit (S3205: Yes), in order to validate the operation of the image save button 23, the valid flag 233i is turned on and the image is displayed. In order to turn on the storage lamp 23a, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3206). If the current variation effect is not satisfied (S3205: No), the valid flag 233i is turned off and the image is displayed. In order to turn off the storage lamp 23a, an image storage lamp turn-off command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3209. In the processes of S3206 and S3207, the image storage lamp 23a is turned on or off depending on whether or not the operation of the image storage button 23 is enabled, so whether the image storage button 23 is enabled for the player. It can be recognized whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the image saving button 23 is made effective only when the fluctuation display to be started this time is a big hit. However, the big hit is a big hit and the probability big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The operation of the image save button 23 may be validated only when the image save button 23 is operated, or the operation of the image save button 23 is validated only when a specific effect (for example, a premier effect) appears during the variable display. It is good as a thing. That is, when the condition for increasing the game value given to the player is satisfied, the operation of the image storage button 23 is enabled and the image storage lamp 23a is turned on, so that the player is notified when the image storage button 23 is turned on. Recognize that it is a hot performance.

  Of course, the operation of the image saving button 23 may be validated even when the fluctuation display to be started this time is out of place. In this configuration, in the case of the next jackpot, the effect of changing display when the image saving button 23 is operated is reproduced, so that the player changes when the image saving button 23 is operated. The game can be continued with the expectation that the next jackpot will occur in order to view the display effect or take a picture with the mobile phone terminal.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the display executed by the third symbol display device 81 is changing (S3201: Yes), the change time counter (not shown) is updated (S3208), The process proceeds to S3209. The fluctuation time counter is updated by reading the value of the fluctuation time counter, adding 1 to the value, and writing the added value back to the fluctuation time counter.

  In the process of S3209, it is determined whether or not the symbol stop flag 233d is on (S3208). If the symbol stop flag 233d is not on (S3208: No), in the process of S3011 of the external interrupt process (see FIG. 20). From the variation effect data corresponding to the variation mode extracted from the variation pattern command for display, the variation effect data corresponding to the variation elapsed time indicated by the variation time counter (the elapsed time since the variation effect was started) is obtained from the video RAM 234. The data is read and stored in a variable effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3210). Next, an image corresponding to the variation effect data stored in the variation effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S3211), and the variation effect process (S3110) is terminated. In the processing of S3210 and S3211, the fluctuating effect data stored in the video RAM 234 is image data for each screen displayed on the LCD screen of the third symbol display device 81. A variable effect is performed by displaying continuously.

  On the other hand, if the symbol stop flag 233d is turned on as a result of the processing of S3209 (S3208: Yes), it is the timing to stop the symbol that is changing in the variable display, and is set in S3013 of the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). The symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stopped with the stopped symbols (S3212), the symbol stop flag 233d is turned off (S3213), and the variation effect process (3110) is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (when the symbol stop flag 233d is turned on), the symbol of the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped. However, since the variation time of the symbol is determined by the variation pattern command, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation time has elapsed based on the value of the variation time counter and stop the symbol.

  Next, the jackpot effect process (S3109) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect process (S3109) executed in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the jackpot effect process, first, the current number of rounds in the jackpot is acquired from the round counter 233e (S3301). Next, it is determined whether there is reproduction data that has not been reproduced and displayed during the big hit round among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (S3302). In the process of S3302, the value of the image storage counter g is 0 and no reproduction data is stored, or in the processes of S3307 and S3308, which will be described later, all reproductions of effects based on the reproduction data have been completed. Determined.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3302 that there is no reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the big hit round (S3302: No), a valid flag is set to invalidate the operation of the big hit image save button 23. In addition to turning off 233i, an image storage lamp turn-off command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to turn off the image storage lamp 23a (S3303). Then, in order to perform a normal jackpot round effect, effect data corresponding to the number of rounds is read from the video RAM 234, stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3312. Transition.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3302 that there is reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the jackpot round, the current current value is determined based on the value of the round counter 233e acquired in the processing of S3301. It is determined whether the number of rounds is 3 or more (S3305). In the processing of S3305, it is confirmed whether the current round number is 3 or more. In this embodiment, the saved images are displayed in rounds 1 and 2, for example, in rounds 3 to 7. And a description of the player participation type event that is performed during the jackpot, etc. are displayed, and it is possible to reproduce the effect when the image save button 23 is operated by the player between round 3 and round 7 This is because it is configured. Also, it is not confirmed whether or not it is round 7 or less. The upper limit of the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is five, and when all of them are reproduced and displayed, the processing of S3302 is This is because it is always No and the processing of S3303 and S3304 is executed.

  Further, the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced in the first half of the 16 rounds. That is, in the second half round, after the big hit, a promotion effect that shifts to a probable change state can be performed. Therefore, during the jackpot production, the first round will reproduce the production that the player wishes to view or shoot later on the mobile phone terminal, and the second round will be promoted to the probable state, The player can play the entire jackpot production with a sense of expectation.

  In the process of S3305, if the number of rounds is smaller than 3 (S3305: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3303, the operation of the image saving button 23 is invalidated (S3303), and the effect data corresponding to the number of rounds is video. The data is read from the RAM 234, stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  In the process of S3305, if the number of rounds is 3 or more (S3305: Yes), the reproduction of the effect based on the reproduction data is performed during the jackpot, and the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. The effective flag 233i is turned on in order to validate the operation of the image storage button 23 when the effect is resumed, and an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to turn on the image storage lamp 23a. (S3306). In the process of S3306, the image storage lamp lighting command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, so that the image storage lamp 23a is turned on. Therefore, the player is informed that the image storage button 23 can be operated even during the jackpot. Can be recognized. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the image storage button 23 is operated during the production of the variable display, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the image storage button 23 can be operated even during the jackpot, but the image storage lamp 23a. By turning on, the player can recognize that the image storage lamp 23 can be operated even during a big hit.

  Next, it is determined whether the reproduction of the effect is currently being executed based on the reproduction data (S3307). If the reproduction is not being performed (S3307: No), the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is used. In order to reproduce the effect, the oldest reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is acquired (S3308).

  In the process of S3309, the time corresponding to 2 seconds is subtracted from the elapsed time of the reproduction data acquired in the process of S3308 (S3309), and the process proceeds to S3310. In the present embodiment, the processing of S3309 is performed in order to start reproduction of the effect two seconds before the effect at the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player. This is a case where the premier effect is finished in a short time by reproducing the effect from 2 seconds before the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, and the player's operation of the image save button 23 is not in time. However, the premier production can be reproduced.

  If the reproduction of the effect based on the reproduction data is currently being executed in the processing of S3307 (S3307: No), the processing of S3308 and S3309 is not executed (that is, the reproduction data is newly acquired). None), the process proceeds to S3310.

  In the process of S3310, it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S3310). If the reproduction stop flag 233j is off (S3310: No), it is not necessary to stop and display the reproduced effect. Therefore, reproduction of the jackpot effect data for reproduction according to the display variation pattern command acquired in the process of S3308 and the elapsed time subtracted by 2 seconds in the process of S3309 is started based on the jackpot effect data. Is read out from the video RAM 234 according to the elapsed time from and stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S3311), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  In the process of S3311, an effect is repeatedly performed for 10 seconds from the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player for 10 seconds (8 seconds from the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player). As shown in the figure, this is a process for repeatedly storing the jackpot effect data for reproduction according to the display variation pattern command and the elapsed time in the jackpot effect area of the video RAM 234. This is because the timing of winning a ball to the specific winning opening 65a is different in the big hit round, and each round time is different, so during the round, the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 This is to repeat the reproduction. Alternatively, the normal jackpot round effect may be executed when reproduction of the effect for 10 seconds is completed from 2 seconds before the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player.

  On the other hand, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is on in the processing of S3310 (S3310: Yes), an image for causing the player to stop and display the effect while the effect based on the reproduction data is being reproduced during the jackpot. Since the save button 23 has been operated, the process proceeds to S3312 without executing the process in S3311 (that is, without updating the effect data based on the reproduction data to the video RAM 234). Note that, in the process of S3310, when the update of the effect data based on the reproduction data is temporarily stopped, the elapsed time of the effect at which the reproduction is started is also temporarily stopped.

  When the reproduction stop flag 233j is on in the process of S3310, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being updated by not executing the process of S3311. Therefore, since the player can stop and display the display desired to be photographed on the mobile phone terminal or the like among the variable displays reproduced during the jackpot, the player can surely photograph the display that has been stopped and displayed. it can.

  In the process of S3312, an image corresponding to the jackpot effect data stored in the jackpot effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S3312), and this jackpot effect process (S3109) is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the image save button 23 is operated by the player while the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit. Then, the reproduction data that can reproduce the effect of the variable display when the image saving button 23 is operated is stored in the image saving area 233h. Then, when the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and the jackpot is shifted to the jackpot, the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced and displayed during the jackpot round. The Therefore, the player can visually recognize the premier effect during the jackpot by operating the image save button 23 when a rare effect such as a premier effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. Mobile phone terminals can be prepared with plenty of room, so you can shoot premier effects and save them as photos.

  The operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled while the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the display is immediately changed by operating the image operation button 23. During the jackpot, the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal. Here, even if the player operates the image storage button 23 and the reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored in the image storage area 233h, thereafter, the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed a plurality of times. When it is performed (for example, hundreds of times), it becomes difficult for the player to know at what timing the effect of the variable display stored by operating the image storage button 23 is stored. As a result, it is conceivable that the player's willingness to operate the image storage button 23 is reduced. However, since the player can reproduce the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image storage button 23 during the big hit that immediately shifts by operating the image operation button 23, the willingness to operate the image storage button 23 provided at the corner is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, for example, if the variation display effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is configured to be reproducible during another variation display, the current variation display is the current variation display effect. If the player operates the image saving button 23, it becomes impossible to determine the effect of the variable display, and the reliability of the variable display is lowered. However, in this embodiment, since the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is performed during the jackpot, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the effect of the variable display from being lowered.

  In addition, when the image storage button 23 is operated by the player and the reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored in the image storage area 233h, the image actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Instead of data (data for generating an image in units of screen as described above, for example, bitmap data), a display variation pattern command for instructing a display form of variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and image storage Information on the elapsed time when the button 23 is operated is stored. When the player operates the image storage button 23 based on the display variation pattern command stored in the image storage area 233h and information on the elapsed time when the image storage button 23 is operated, the third The effects performed in the symbol display device 81 are reproduced and displayed in the big hit round (round 3 to round 7). Therefore, in order to reproduce the effect performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the player operates the image saving button 23, for example, it is not necessary to store bitmap data having a large amount of data. It is not necessary to secure a large storage capacity of the storage area 233h. Therefore, a RAM having a small maximum storage capacity can be used as the work RAM 233, and the apparatus cost can be reduced.

  Further, in the case where the reproduction data for reproducing the effect of the variable display is stored in the image storage area 233h, the bit data after the player operates the image storage button 23 in the configuration in which the bitmap data or the like is stored. Map data will be stored. Further, as described above, some of the premier effects performed during variable display end in a short time. In other words, when the player operates the image saving button 23, the premier effect may end, and in this case, bitmap data after the time when the player operates the image saving button 23 is stored. Even so, the effect that the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal is not reproduced. However, in this embodiment, when the player operates the image saving button 23, the display variation pattern command for instructing the display form of the variation display performed on the third symbol display device 81 and the image saving button 23 are operated. Since the information on the elapsed time at the time is stored in the image storage area 233h, it is possible to freely set the effect reproduced during the jackpot (the period for reproducing and displaying it freely), and the player can view or carry it You can reproduce and display the effect you want to shoot on the phone terminal.

  Further, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the effect (premier effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reproduced and displayed during the rounds 3 to 7 of the big hit. If the player operates the image save button 23 again while the effect is reproduced during the big hit round, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player operates the image save button 23 while the premiere effect is being reproduced during the jackpot, thereby stopping and displaying the image desired to be viewed or viewed with the mobile phone terminal among the premier effect. Therefore, the stopped and displayed image can be surely viewed or taken with a mobile phone terminal. In particular, when shooting with a mobile phone terminal, if it is a video, there is a possibility that it will be blurred or blurred even if it is shot. You can re-shoot. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the desired image or capture the image with the mobile phone terminal.

In addition, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player and the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, when the image save button 23 is operated again by the player, the effect that is stopped and displayed is displayed. Resumed. Therefore, even if there are a plurality of presentations in which the player wants to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal is being reproduced, the player can operate the image save button 23 again to continue the presentation. Resumed. For example, if the effect that is being reproduced is stopped and displayed, and if the image save button 23 is operated again, if the effect is reproduced from the beginning, all effects (for 10 seconds) There is a possibility that it cannot be reproduced). However, the image save button 23 is displayed while the reproduced effect is stopped.
When is operated again, the reproduction is resumed from the time point when the stop is displayed, so that there is a high possibility that the effect can be reproduced during the round. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of displays for which visual recognition or shooting with a mobile phone terminal is desired during the reproduction of one, the player can easily view the desired presentation with visual or mobile phone terminals.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the operation of the image storage button 23 is enabled only when the current variation display is a big hit, and the player saves the image save button 23 with a big hit effect that shifts after the change display stops. It was configured to reproduce and display the effects when operating. In addition to this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the player intentionally stops the game and the demonstration production is started, the player operates the image saving button 23 in the demonstration production. It is also assumed that there is a configuration that reproduces and displays the effect of the case. In addition, about the structure same as 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment enables the operation of the image saving button 23 to be effective when the effect reproduced during the demonstration effect is stopped and displayed, so the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is effective. In step S3021 of the external interrupt processing executed in step S1021, it is determined whether the demonstration effect is being performed instead of determining whether the big hit flag 233f is on.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the changing effect process (S3110) and the demo screen effect process (S3107) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 shows a demonstration screen executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production process.

  When the variation effect process shown in FIG. 25 is executed and the variation time counter is reset (S3204), an effective flag is used to validate the operation of the image saving button 23 regardless of whether or not the current variation effect is a big hit. While turning on 233i, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to light the image storage lamp 23a (S4001), and the process proceeds to S3209.

  Also, in the process of S3209, the symbol stop flag 233d is on, and the symbol is stopped. When the symbol stop flag 233d is turned off (S3213), the valid flag 233i is set to invalidate the operation of the image save button 23. In addition to turning off, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 to turn off the image storage lamp 23a (S4002), and the variation effect process (S3110) is terminated.

  In other words, the second embodiment is configured such that the operation of the image saving button 23 is valid while the changing effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the demonstration screen processing shown in FIG. 26 is executed, it is determined whether there is reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the demonstration effect among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (S4101). In the processing of S4101, the value of the image storage counter g is 0 and no reproduction data is stored, or in the processing of S4110 and S4111 described later, the reproduction of the effects based on the reproduction data has been completed. Determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S4101 that there is reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed in the demonstration effect (S4101: Yes), an image save button for stopping and displaying the effect reproduced during the demonstration effect. The effective flag 233i is turned on to validate the operation 23, and an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 to light the image storage lamp 23a (S4105).

  Next, it is determined whether the reproduction of the effect is being executed based on the reproduction data (S4106). If the reproduction is not being performed (S4106: No), the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is used. In order to reproduce the effect, the oldest reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced among the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is acquired (S4107). Further, the process of S4106 is being reproduced even when a predetermined wait time (for example, about 2 seconds) has not elapsed after the reproduction of the effect of the variable display based on the previous reproduction data has been completed. Determined.

  In the process of S4108, the elapsed time of the reproduction data acquired in the process of S4107 is subtracted from the time corresponding to 2 seconds (S4108), and the process proceeds to S4109. In the present embodiment, the process of S4108 is for the reproduction of the production to be started 2 seconds before the production at the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player. By reproducing the effect from 2 seconds before the time when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the appearance of characters and the like ends in a short time, and the player's operation of the image save button 23 is in time for the effect. Even if it is not, it is possible to reproduce an effect that ends in a short time.

  If it is determined in step S4106 that an effect is being reproduced based on the reproduction data (S4106: No), the process proceeds to step S4109 without executing steps S4107 and S4108.

  In the process of S4109, it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop flag 233j is on (S4109). If the reproduction stop flag 233j is off (S4109: No), there is no need to stop and display the reproduced effect. Therefore, the video RAM 234 according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction of reproduction effect data according to the display variation pattern command acquired in the process of S4107 and the elapsed time subtracted by 2 seconds in the process of S4108. This is read out and stored in the demonstration screen effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 (S4110), and the process proceeds to S4111.

  On the other hand, if the reproduction stop flag 233j is turned on in the process of S4109 (S4109: Yes), the image storage button 23 has been operated to stop and display the effect reproduced during the demonstration effect, so the process of S4110 Is executed (that is, the effect data based on the reproduction data is not updated in the video RAM 234), and the process proceeds to S4111. If the processing of S4109 is Yes and the update of the effect data based on the reproduction data is temporarily stopped, the elapsed time of the effect at which the reproduction is started is also temporarily stopped.

  When the reproduction stop flag 233j is on in the process of S4109 (S4109: Yes), the display of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being updated by not executing the process of S4110. become. Therefore, the player can stop and display the display desired to be photographed on the mobile phone terminal among the variable displays reproduced during the demonstration production. Can do.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4101 that there is no reproduction data that has not yet been reproduced and displayed during the demonstration production (S4101: No), the valid flag 233i is set to invalidate the operation of the image saving button 23. In addition to turning off, an image storage lamp turn-off command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 to turn off the image storage lamp 23a (S4102). In order to produce a normal demonstration screen, the demonstration production data corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the demonstration screen is read from the video RAM 234 and stored in a demonstration production area (not shown) of the video RAM 234. (S4103).

  Then, the execution of the processing of S4103 means that the reproduction of effects based on all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h has been completed, so the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is deleted. At the same time, the image storage counter 233g is initialized (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4111.

  In the process of S4111, an image corresponding to the jackpot effect data stored in the jackpot effect area is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S4111), and the jackpot effect process (S3107) is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the demonstration is performed when the period during which the variable display is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (1 minute in the present embodiment). During the performance, the variation display effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced and displayed. Therefore, if the player suspends the game by releasing the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1) or the like, the effect of the variable display when the image save button 23 is operated is reproduced and displayed. Depending on the player's will, the effect of the variable display when the image storage button 23 is operated can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  Further, for all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h, when reproduction of the effect of the variable display is finished, the reproduction data in the image storage area 233h is deleted and an initial value is set to the value of the image storage counter 233g. Is done. That is, when the demonstration effect ends, reproduction data is not stored in the image storage area 233h. Therefore, next time when the demonstration effect is performed, the effect reproduced in the previous demonstration effect is not repeatedly reproduced. It is possible to prevent giving a player a pleasant feeling.

  Further, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the effect (premier effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reproduced and displayed during the demonstration effect. If the player operates the image save button 23 while the effect is being reproduced during the demonstration effect, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, and the image save button 23 is operated again. Then, the effect that was stopped and displayed is resumed and reproduced. Therefore, the player operates the image save button 23 while the premiere effect is being reproduced during the demonstration effect, thereby stopping and displaying the image desired to be photographed by the visual recognition or the mobile phone terminal among the premier effect. be able to. Therefore, the player can surely view or photograph the stopped display image with the mobile phone terminal, and there are a plurality of displays in which the desired display for viewing or photographing with the mobile phone terminal is being reproduced. Even in this case, the desired effect can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the second embodiment, for all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h, when reproduction of the effect of the variable display is finished, the reproduction data in the image storage area 233h is deleted and the value of the image storage counter 233g is used. However, when a new display variation pattern command is received in a state where the demonstration effect is being performed, that is, when the demonstration effect ends, the image storage area 233h The reproduction data may be deleted and an initial value may be set as the value of the image storage counter 233g. Since the player has operated the operation handle 51 to receive the display variation pattern command in the state where the demonstration effect is being performed, the player can display his own reproduction display of the variation display effect. It was canceled by will. Therefore, it is possible to provide gameability according to the player's will.

  In the second embodiment, the player can reproduce and display the variable display effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 in either the jackpot effect or the demo effect. Thus, it may be configured to reproduce and display the effect of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23. If the player can reproduce and display the variable display effect when the player operates the image save button 23 only during the jackpot effect, when the player operates the image save button 23 during the variable display, the image In order to view the effect of the variable display by the operation of the save button 23 or to shoot with the mobile phone terminal, it is possible to play a game while expecting a shift to jackpot. Also, if the player can reproduce and display the variation display effect when the player operates the image storage button 23 only during the demonstration performance, the image can be immediately saved by interrupting the game at the player's will. The effect of the variable display by the operation of 23 can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the second embodiment, the reproduction of the effect of the variable display is finished for all the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h, and the normal demonstration effect is displayed when there is no reproduction data that is not reproduced. However, when the demonstration effect is started, if one or more reproduction data is stored in the image storage area 233h, the reproduction of the variable display effects based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is performed in order. You may comprise so that it may display repeatedly.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the customer waiting effect process (see S2104 in FIG. 16) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a demonstration execution command is displayed when one minute has passed after the variable display is ended. However, the display control device 114 may be configured to measure the elapsed time after the end of the variable display and perform a demonstration effect when the elapsed time has passed 1 minute. In this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a demonstration execution command transmitted from the main control device 110 one second after the end of the variable display, the received demonstration execution command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 In 114, the elapsed time from the reception of the demonstration execution command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is measured. Further, in the main process of the display control device 114, a process of determining whether one minute has elapsed after the end of the variable display is executed instead of the process of determining whether the demonstration execution flag 233c is on in the process of S3106. Is done. Further, the main control device 110 determines whether one minute has elapsed since the end of the variable display, and when one minute has elapsed since the end of the variable display, the main control device 110 displays the sound lamp control device 113 (display). The demonstration execution command may be transmitted to the control device 114), and the demonstration effect may be started at the timing when the display control device 114 receives the demonstration execution command.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments, the image saving button 23 is displayed while the effect of the variable display based on the operation of the image saving button 23 by the player is reproduced on the third symbol display device 81. When operated, the reproduction is reproduced and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments, a “+” button or a “−” button is displayed in a state in which the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. When operated, the stop-displayed image is configured to be capable of frame advance and frame reverse. In the following description, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and different parts from the second embodiment will be omitted for simplification of description. Therefore, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing button input monitoring / production processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 28 is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 113 according to the third embodiment.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a cross key including a “+” button and a “−” button is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. The work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment is provided with an elapsed time counter 233m and an elapsed time change flag 233n in addition to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

  The elapsed time counter 233m is a counter that indicates the elapsed time of the effect to be reproduced when the effect when the player operates the image storage button 23 is reproduced, and the image save button 23 is operated by the player. In this case, the elapsed time of the production of the variable display is shown. In the present embodiment, when the “+” button command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the elapsed time counter 233m adds a value corresponding to 0.1 second (see S4602 in FIG. 28), and the sound lamp control device 113. When the “−” button command is received from “1”, a value corresponding to 0.1 second is subtracted (S4605 in FIG. 28).

  The elapsed time change flag 233n is a flag for determining whether or not the “+” button or the “−” button is operated by the player while the reproduced image is stopped and displayed. It is turned on every time a “+” button command or a “−” button command is received from 113 (see S4603 and S4606 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when an effect corresponding to the elapsed time changed in the processing of S3311 is set. (See S4702 in FIG. 29).

  When the button input monitoring / effect process shown in FIG. 27 is executed and the process according to the presence / absence of the operation of the frame button 22 is completed (S2403: No or S2404), it is then determined whether the “+” button has been operated. (S4501), if the “+” button is operated (S4501: Yes), the “+” button command is output to the display control device 114 (S4502), and if the “+” button is not operated (S4501: No), the process proceeds to S4503 without performing the process in S4502.

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the “−” button has been operated (S4503). If the “−” button has been operated (S4503: Yes), the “−” button command is output to the display control device 114 ( In S4504), if the "-" button is not operated (S4503: No), the button input monitoring / effect process is terminated without performing the process of S4504.

  When the external interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 is executed and it is determined that the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is not an image storage command (S3008: No), it is determined whether the received command is a “+” button command. It is determined (S4601).

  If the received command is a “+” button command in the process of S4601 (S4601: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 233m is added by 0.1 second (S4602), and the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on ( If the received command is not a “+” button command (S4603), the process proceeds to S4604 without executing S4602 and S4603.

  In the process of S4604, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a “−” button command (S4604). If the received command is a “−” button command in the process of S4604 (S4604: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 233m is subtracted by 0.1 second (S4605) and the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on ( In S4606), if the received command is not a “−” button command (S4604: No), the external interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of S4605 and S4606.

  In addition, every time a “+” button command or a “−” button command is received, the elapsed time is added or subtracted by 0.1 seconds. However, the addition or subtraction time may be 0.5 seconds. The time can be set as appropriate. Also, a created counter for screen data created to display the effect on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided, and one (or a plurality) of screen data is added to or subtracted from the counter. You may comprise as follows. By providing a created counter and adding / subtracting the number of creations of screen data to be displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of operations of the “+” button or “−” button by the player, and the third symbol The correspondence with the image displayed on the display device 81 becomes accurate.

  When the jackpot effect process shown in FIG. 29 is executed and it is determined that the reproduction stop flag 233k is on (S3310: Yes), the effect reproduced on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on in order to confirm whether or not the “+” button or the “−” button when the stop-displayed image is moved forward or backward is operated by the player. Is discriminated (S4701).

  If the elapsed time change flag 233n is off in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), the “+” button or the “−” button is not operated by the player, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. Since the image may be displayed as it is, the process proceeds to S3312. On the other hand, if the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned on in the process of S4701 (S4701: Yes), it is necessary to display the stopped display image of the third symbol display device 81 by frame-by-frame display. The jackpot effect data corresponding to the variation pattern command and the elapsed time changed by the “+” button command or the “−” button command is stored in the video RAM 234 (S4702), and then the elapsed time change flag 233n is turned off. (S4703), the process proceeds to S3312.

  In other words, if it is determined in step S4701 that the elapsed time change flag 233n is on, an effect corresponding to the elapsed time that is added or subtracted according to the operation of the “+” button or the “−” button in step S4702. Since the data is stored in the video RAM 234, on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the stopped display image is displayed in a display mode in which frame advance or frame return is performed. Therefore, the player can stop and display on the third symbol display device 81 an image desired to be viewed or taken with the mobile phone terminal.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the “+” button or the “−” button is displayed in a state where the effect reproduced on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the player's operation. When is operated, the stopped image is displayed by frame advance or frame return. Therefore, when the player operates the “+” button or the “−” button, the image stopped and displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be forwarded or moved back, so that the reproduced image is stopped and displayed. Even when the operation of the image saving button 23 for delaying is delayed, the image desired by the player can be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make sure that the image desired by the player is visually recognized or photographed by the mobile phone terminal.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the image saving button 23 is made effective, and the effect of the variable display is being made a big hit or demonstration effect. It was configured to be reproduced and displayed. Instead, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled when the jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the effect during the jackpot is displayed as the image saving button. 23 can be reproduced and displayed during the jackpot operated. In the following description, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and different parts from the second and third embodiments will be omitted for the sake of simplicity. Therefore, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot presentation, and FIG. 31 shows an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a change effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 33 is an MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 113 of the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot production process performed by.

  Although not shown, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment is provided with a reproduction stop permission flag 233k in addition to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. The reproduction stop permission flag 233k enables the operation of the image storage button 23 when selecting an effect to be reproduced during the jackpot, or enables the operation of the image storage button 23 when stopping or displaying the reproduced effect. It is a flag that determines whether or not This reproduction stop permission flag 233k is used when the reproduction of the effect is started in the big hit round on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the operation of the image saving button 23 when the reproduced effect is stopped or displayed is resumed. It is turned on to enable (S5106), and turned off when display of another round in which the effect is not reproduced is started (S5102).

  First, an example of a jackpot effect will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot effect shown in FIG. 30 (a) is a normal jackpot effect, and on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a display of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed in a variable display when the jackpot is reached ( In FIG. 30 (a), “7 dugong display” and the number of big hits (in FIG. 30 (a), “4” round display) are displayed. As a background display, a state where a plurality of fish are swimming on the seabed is displayed.

  On the other hand, the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 30 (b) is a premium jackpot effect, for example, an effect displayed when the jackpot including probability variation and time reduction continues five or more times. In this premier effect, a combination of symbols and the number of rounds during the jackpot are displayed in the same way as a normal jackpot. Then, as a background display, a girl in a swimsuit of a live-action image is displayed on the beach (in this embodiment, three girls' videos).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the external interruption process performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

  If an external interrupt process is executed and the valid flag 233i is on in the process of S3020 (S3020: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is on (S5001), and the reproduction stop permission flag 233k. Is ON (S5001: Yes), the operation of the image save button 23 is enabled in the state where the effect based on the reproduction data is reproduced, so the process proceeds to S3026 and the reproduction stop flag 233j is determined. (S3026) After executing the process of turning on or off the reproduction stop flag 233j (S3027, S3028), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is off (S5001: No), the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled in a state where the effect based on the reproduction data is not reproduced and the premier effect is being performed. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S3022, and if the value of the image storage counter 233g is smaller than 5 in the process of S3022 (S3022: Yes), the round in which the image storage button 23 is operated (that is, the premier effect is performed). Round) and the elapsed time from the start of the round effect when the image save button 23 is operated are stored as reproduction data in the image save area 233h (S5002), and the value of the image save counter 233g is set to 1. Addition is performed (S3024), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player to store reproduction data for reproducing the big hit effect, it is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Rather than the image data (data for generating the image in units of screens described above), the number of rounds with a big hit and information on the elapsed time when the image save button 23 is operated are stored. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the storage capacity of the image storage area 233h as much as when image data is stored, a storage unit having a small maximum storage capacity can be used for the work RAM 233, and the apparatus cost can be reduced. it can.

  The variation effect process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 32 is configured so that the fourth embodiment reproduces and displays the jackpot premiere effect during the jackpot, Since the display of the variable display is configured so as not to be reproduced later, the processing of S3205 to S3207 for setting the operation of the image saving button 23 to be valid or invalid is deleted. That is, when the variation time counter is reset in the process of S3204 (S3204), a process of determining whether the symbol stop flag 233d is on is executed (S3209).

  Of course, in the fourth embodiment, the operation of the image saving button 23 may be validated while the variation display effect is being performed, and the variation display effect may be reproducible during the big hit round. . In this configuration, if the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h is only the data corresponding to the effect of the variable display, the effect is reproduced in rounds 3 to 7 of the big hit and stored in the image storage area 233h. When there is a possibility that the reproduction data is mixed with reproduction data according to the presentation of the variable display and the premiere effect of the jackpot (that is, when this jackpot is a jackpot for performing the premiere effect), the final round or You may comprise so that an effect may be reproduced in the continuous round including the last round.

  When the jackpot effect process shown in FIG. 33 is executed and it is determined that there is unreproduced reproduction data (3202: Yes), the current round number acquired in the process of S3301 is an image from 16 which is the maximum round number. It is determined whether or not the value of the storage counter 233g is greater than the value obtained by subtraction (S5101). In the fourth embodiment, it is configured to reproduce and display effects in the latter half of the round including the final round of jackpot, and up to five pieces of reproduction data can be stored in the image storage area 233h. The production is configured to be reproduced.

  Furthermore, since the value of the image storage counter 233g is subtracted from the maximum number of rounds of 16, if there is only one reproduction data, the effect is reproduced only in the final round, and even if there are multiple pieces of reproduction data, the final round Production is reproduced in successive rounds including In other words, when the jackpot premiere effect is reproduced later, it is performed in the second half including the final round among the big hit rounds, so the first half round can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, since many premiere effects and the like can be displayed using many rounds in the first half, the types of display modes are also increased, and the effects of the big hit can be diversified.

  If the current round number is equal to or smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the value of the image storage counter 233g from the maximum number of rounds 16 in the process of S5101, (S5101: No), based on the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h. Since this is not a round in which the production is reproduced, as described above, the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is turned off to prevent the reproduction stop flag 233j from being turned on or off (S5102).

  After completion of the processing of S5102, it is determined whether or not it is a round for executing the premier effect (S5103). If it is not a round for executing the premier effect (S5103: No), the process proceeds to S3303, and the normal jackpot If it is a round in which the effect is performed and the premier effect is executed (S5103: Yes), the enable flag 233i is turned on and the image storage lamp is turned on in order to validate the operation of the image storage button 23 when reproducing the premier effect later. In order to light 23a, an image storage lamp lighting command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S5104). Then, the jackpot effect data corresponding to the premium effect is stored in the jackpot effect area of the video RAM 234 (S5105), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  If the current number of rounds is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the value of the image storage counter 233g from the maximum number of rounds 16 (S5101: Yes) in the processing of S5101, the reproduction stop flag 233j is changed to ON or OFF. After the reproduction stop permission flag 233k is turned on (S5106), the valid flag 233i is turned on and an image storage lamp lighting command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3306). Continue processing.

  If the reproduction stop flag 233j is OFF in the process of S3310 (S3310: No), the number of rounds stored in the process of S5002 of the external interrupt process and the elapsed time subtracted by 2 seconds in the process of S3309 Is reproduced from the video RAM 234 according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction based on the jackpot effect data, and stored in a jackpot effect area (not shown) of the video RAM 234. (S5107), and the process proceeds to S3312.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the premiere effect is performed in the big hit round, the operation of the image saving button 23 is enabled while the premier effect is performed, and the image is displayed. When the save button 23 is operated, the premier effect is reproduced and displayed in the round after the jackpot. Therefore, since the premiere effect that is a big hit can be reproduced and displayed later, the player can view the premier effect or the like later by operating the image saving button 23 or using a mobile phone terminal.

  Here, as described above, since the occurrence frequency of the jackpot is extremely low with respect to the number of variable displays, until the next jackpot occurrence, the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is not reproduced, While the game can be continued with a sense of expectation until the next jackpot, there is a possibility that the willingness to operate the image saving button 23 will be reduced if many variable displays are made before the next jackpot. However, when the player operates the image saving button 23 to reproduce the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the reproduction is performed during the jackpot, so that the user is willing to operate the image saving button 23. It can suppress that it falls.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the premiere effect is reproduced in a later round, the operation of the image saving button 23 is configured to be valid, but other than the round in which the effect is reproduced (the final round or the final round) The operation of the image storage button 23 may be validated in all rounds (except for consecutive rounds including). In other words, in this configuration, the image save button 23 becomes effective in all rounds, so the processes of S3303, S3306, and S5104 are deleted, and the valid flag 233i is turned on while the jackpot effect is being executed. At the same time, an image storage lamp lighting command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the player can easily shoot not only the premier effects but also all round effects with the mobile phone terminal or the like, so that the display according to the player's preference can be viewed or photographed with the mobile phone terminal. Whether the player is operating the image saving button 23 for reproducing the jackpot effect in a later round, or is the operation of the image saving button 23 for stopping or resuming the reproduced effect being reproduced? Therefore, it is preferable to display which one of the operations of the image save button 23 is effective in each round.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated during the jackpot, the effect of the player operating the image save button 23 is reproduced and displayed during the jackpot. When the next jackpot is made, it is possible to reproduce and display the effect of the player operating the image saving button 23. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation until the next big hit. Furthermore, it is good also as what is reproduced and displayed on the demonstration screen after jackpot end. Also, depending on the game state (whether it is a probable change) after the jackpot is over, it will be changed whether it will be reproduced during the current jackpot or displayed during the next jackpot. It may be configured. In other words, if the gaming state after the jackpot is definitely changed, the next jackpot is likely to occur with the number of variable displays, so even if it is configured to reproduce the presentation during the next jackpot, the player It can be suppressed that the willingness to operate the image save button 23 is reduced.

  In the fourth embodiment, the premier effect is reproduced in the last round or consecutive rounds including the last round (up to 5 rounds). For example, after 9 rounds (that is, the latter half) If there is, you can reproduce the production in any round. In other words, if there are 8 rounds in the first half, 1 to 8, it is possible to sufficiently display a premier effect or the like.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that reproduction of a premier effect may be performed all in the last round. This configuration eliminates the need for the player to play the game while holding the mobile phone terminal for a maximum of 5 rounds, so that the player can play a big hit game (such as visual recognition of the performance) before the last round. You can concentrate. Also, for example, if a plurality of premier effects are performed before round 13 and the premier effects are reproduced in rounds 14 and 15, or if the player operates the image save button 23 a plurality of times, It may be configured to reproduce the effect in the final round by selecting whether the effect is reproduced and displayed, and the jackpot effect can be diversified and the gameability can be improved. The upper limit of the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h may be 1.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the effect reproduced during the big hit round is stopped and displayed, it is of course possible to perform frame advance or frame reverse by operating the “+” button or the “−” button. I do not care.

  The present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the player operates the image saving button 23, the effect reproduced on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed during the jackpot or the demonstration effect. A sound output device 226 (auxiliary effect means) that outputs sound linked to an effect (variation display or jackpot effect) performed on the symbol display device 81, and a display linked to an effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 The lamp display device 227 (auxiliary effect means) that performs the above may be configured to be reproduced. In this configuration, for example, when reproducing an effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 starts and reproduces a command or effect indicating reproduction data from the audio lamp control device 113. You may comprise so that the command which shows a stop may be transmitted. Further, in this configuration, since the overall effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 can be reproduced, the player can visually recognize the overall effect later or shoot with the mobile phone terminal. In addition, when it has the accessory which operate | moves in conjunction with the production performed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, you may comprise so that the accessory may be reproduced similarly.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect for 10 seconds from 2 seconds before the time when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced and displayed during the jackpot or demonstration effect. A corresponding effect may be reproduced and displayed while the save button 23 is being operated. In this configuration, the display variation pattern command or jackpot round number in the image storage area 233h, the variation display when the image storage button 23 is started to operate, the elapsed time since the start of the round, and the operation of the image storage button 23 Is stored, and the elapsed time from the start of the round is stored. Based on the display variation pattern command or the number of rounds and the elapsed time of the operation start and operation end of the image save button 23, An effect or a jackpot premier effect is reproduced and displayed. Therefore, among the effects performed on the 3rd symbol display device 18, the effect of only the part where the player operated the image save button 23 can be reproduced and displayed, so that the effect that the player considers unnecessary is displayed later. Can be prevented.

  In the first to third embodiments, when the image save button 23 is operated by the player, the elapsed time of the variable display stored in the image save area 233h is acquired based on the change time counter. However, it may be configured to store the number of image data in units of screens created for performing variable display on the LCD screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this configuration, since the elapsed time can be measured by the number of image data displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to accurately acquire the elapsed time of the variable display when the image save button 23 is operated. Become. Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of the round in which the jackpot premier effect is performed may be measured based on the number of image data created to display the premier effect. good.

  Further, in the first, third, and fourth embodiments, the reproduction of the effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced and displayed during one big hit round. It is good also as what displays. For example, there are cases where the premier reach has a fluctuation time exceeding 1 minute, and the player may want to visually recognize or record all of the premier reach on a mobile phone terminal. In this case, if the reproduction of the variable display when the player operates the image saving button 23 is performed only in one round, not all the Premier Reach can be visually recognized and cannot be recorded on the mobile phone terminal. However, if the reproduction of the effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is displayed over a plurality of rounds, it is possible to reproduce and display a change display for a long period during the big hit.

  In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, in addition to the image save button 23, a cross key or the like may be provided in the vicinity of the image save button 23. In this configuration, in the jackpot round 1 or round 2, an overview of the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h (partial presentation of the variable display and the time when the saving was performed) is displayed, and the jackpot round You may comprise so that the reproduction data to reproduce and display inside can be selected with a cross key. Similarly, when the demonstration effect is started, an outline of the reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h may be displayed, and the reproduction data to be reproduced and displayed may be selected with the cross key.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the image preservation | save button 23 is operated and the production currently performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is preserve | saved as reproduction data, for a predetermined period (for example, image preservation | save button 23 is operated. It may be informed that the image is being stored for 8 seconds during which the effect of the variable display is reproduced. This notification may display “image is being stored” on a part of the LCD screen of the third symbol display device 81, or the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 notifies that the image is being stored. You may do it.

  In the first to third embodiments, the display variation pattern command for instructing the variation display when the image storage button 23 is operated and the time point when the image storage button 23 is operated are displayed in the image storage area 233h. However, it is also possible to store image data in units of screens for performing variable display on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, moving image data). In this configuration, it is assumed that image data corresponding to variable display while the image save button 23 is being operated is stored. Similarly, in the fourth embodiment, image data for each screen for performing a premier effect may be stored as it is.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the display of the variable display and the jackpot effect when the image save button 23 is operated can be reproduced and displayed on the LCD screen of the third symbol display device. A light emitting unit that emits infrared light is provided on the player's mobile phone terminal via the light emitting unit, and a dynamic display effect moving image and a jackpot premier effect moving image are displayed when the image save button 23 is operated. You may comprise so that the data of the screen of the 3 symbol display apparatus 81 etc. may be transferred. In this configuration, the player can save the trouble of shooting with the mobile phone terminal.

  In addition, various variable display videos and jackpot round videos performed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in an external server, and each of the various variable display videos and jackpot round videos is stored in the external server. An address on the Internet is associated, and when the image save button 23 is operated, the address on the Internet corresponding to the moving image when the image save button 23 is operated is displayed, and the address on the Internet On the other hand, when accessed with a mobile phone terminal, it may be configured such that a variable display or a round video can be downloaded. In addition, instead of an address on the Internet, an image may be displayed that allows access to the address on the Internet by capturing an image using a photo function of the mobile phone terminal.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper limit number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h may be changed according to the number of times the variable display is performed after the power is turned on, the number of reach times, and the number of jackpots. The period during which the image storage button 23 can be operated may be changed. For example, the upper limit of the number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h can be increased or the image storage button 23 can be operated as the number of times the variable display is performed after the power is turned on, the number of times of reach, and the number of jackpots increases. It may be configured to add a period. In this configuration, as the player continues the game, the upper limit number of reproduction data stored in the image storage area 233h increases and the period during which the image storage button 23 can be operated increases. Can increase the willingness to continue.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the date and time when the image storage button 23 is operated, the name of the player, the store name of the hall, etc. are input to the image of the change display and the jackpot effect when the image storage button 23 is operated. You may comprise. In this configuration, there is provided an effect (mode) in which the date and time when the image save button 23 is operated, the name of the player, the store name of the hall, and the like, and the date and time when the image save button 23 is operated by the button operation and the name of the player In addition, it may be configured such that the store name of the hall can be input.

  In the above embodiment, if the image save button 23 is operated by the player during the variable display or the jackpot, the effect (for example, the premier effect) when the image save button 23 is operated is the jackpot or demo effect. It has a function to reproduce and display inside, and a function to make it possible to repeatedly display and stop the production each time the image save button 23 is operated while the production is reproduced. Each time the image save button 23 is operated while the effect is being reproduced, the effect may be configured not to have a function of repeatedly displaying and stopping the effect. Even in this configuration, the effect when the player operates the image saving button 23 is reproduced later, so that the player can view the desired effect or shoot with the mobile phone terminal.

  In the above embodiment, when the image save button 23 is operated again while the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced, the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed. However, if the image save button 23 is operated again while the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced, the reproduced effect is reproduced from the beginning. You may comprise so that it may reproduce again based on data (1st reproduction | regeneration return means). In this configuration, when the player operates the image storage button 23 while the effect is being reproduced, the effect (image) desired to be visually recognized or shot with the mobile phone terminal is reproduced again from the beginning. Therefore, even if the player misses an effect that he or she wants to view or shoot with a mobile phone terminal, the player can operate the image save button 23 again while the effect is being reproduced, thereby shooting the image with the visual or mobile phone terminal. Can give an opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to surely view or photograph the mobile phone terminal with an effect that the player desires to view or capture with the mobile phone terminal.

  Further, while the effect when the player operates the image save button 23 is reproduced, the image save button 23 is operated while the effect that has been reproduced is stopped and displayed. When the operation 23 is operated, the effect is reproduced from the time when the stop is displayed. However, when the image saving button 23 is operated while the effect being reproduced is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to reproduce the reproduced effect from the beginning based on the reproduction data (second reproduction returning means). In this configuration, when an effect that is reproduced by the player operating the image storage button 23 is stopped and displayed, the stopped and displayed image is not an image that the player desires due to the operation delay of the player. Even in this case, since the effect is reproduced again from the beginning, it is possible to give the player the opportunity to view or photograph the desired image with the mobile phone terminal again.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 includes the fluctuation time information and the first hit type counter C2 information (that is, whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). However, such a variation pattern command may be configured as a command that does not include information on the first hit type counter C2 but includes only information on the variation time. When the variation pattern command is configured as a command including only the variation time information, the sound lamp control device 113 normally has a jackpot mode based on the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110. Or whether it is a probable jackpot.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown.

  A main control means for performing main control of the game, and a display device for displaying a plurality of effects based on instructions from the main control means, and dynamic display of identification information as one of the effects is performed on the display device. In the gaming machine to be performed, if the operating means operated by the player and the operation means is operated while the presentation is being performed on the display device, the presentation according to the presentation displayed on the display device Based on the effect storage means in which information is stored and the effect information stored in the effect storage means, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is changed to the dynamic of the identification information. A gaming machine 1 comprising reproduction means for reproducing and displaying during an effect other than display.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when an operation means is operated by a player while an effect is being performed on the display device, effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device is stored in the effect storage means. Then, based on the stored production information, the production displayed on the display device when the operation device is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction device during the production other than the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed on the display device, the player can operate the operation means to display the rare effect later, so that the player can surely see the rare effect. It is also possible to shoot with certainty because there is room to prepare a mobile phone terminal.

  Also, here, if the effect displayed on the display device when the player operates the operating means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the reproduced effect is It is unclear whether it is an effect for the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine 1, since the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the reliability of the direct display effect from being lowered.

  In the gaming machine 1, in the effect storage means, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation means is operated while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. A gaming machine 2 characterized in that information is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 2, when the player operates the operating means while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device, the effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is stored in the effect. Since it is stored in the means, the effect displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information can be reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, since the player can operate the operation means, the dynamic display effect of the identification information when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player operates the operation means, and the rare effect is displayed later. The production can be seen with certainty, and there is room to prepare a mobile phone terminal, so that it is possible to shoot with certainty.

  Further, here, if the effect of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the other identification information, the dynamic information of the current identification information is displayed. It is unclear whether it is an effect on display or an effect of dynamic display of identification information when the player operates the operating means. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine 2, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means at the time other than the dynamic display of the identification information. It is not clear whether the effect of the target display is the effect for the dynamic display of the identification information this time or the effect of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means. It is possible to prevent the reliability of the target display from being lowered.

  In the gaming machine 2, when a stop result of the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the gaming machine 2 includes a transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, The reproduction unit reproduces and displays the effect displayed on the display device when the operation unit is operated when the special game state is entered. .

  According to the gaming machine 3, when the result of stopping the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the transition is made to the special gaming state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, and the special game When the state shifts to the state, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means. Therefore, the player continues the game while expecting a transition to the special gaming state in order to visually recognize or capture the effect when the operation means is operated, so that the player operates the operation means. In this case, it is possible to provide a game that can suppress a decrease in interest in a game, while providing a game that can visually recognize or capture an effect of dynamic display of identification information.

  The gaming machine 3 includes operation valid means for validating the operation of the operation means while the identification information is dynamically displayed when the stop result is a combination of predetermined identification information. A gaming machine 4 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the operation means is activated by the operation valid means while the identification information is dynamically displayed when the stop result is a combination of predetermined identification information. In the special game state that is shifted to after the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped when the is operated, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means.

  Here, even if the player operates the operation means and the effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is stored in the effect storage means, the identification information is dynamically changed several times (for example, hundreds of times) thereafter. When the display is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to determine at which timing the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation means is operated. Therefore, the player continues the game while expecting a transition to the special game state, but even when the player transitions to the special game state, it is difficult to know at what timing the dynamic display of the identification information is operated. Therefore, there is a possibility that the willingness to operate the operating means will be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in the special game state that is shifted to after the dynamic display of the identification information operated by the operating means is stopped, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated immediately is reproduced. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be suppressed from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine 3 or 4, the effect storage means is provided with an upper limit on the number of the effect information stored, and the special gaming state is such that a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times. The reproduction means reproduces and displays an effect based on one effect information for one round in the special gaming state, and the upper limit number of the effect information stored in the effect storage means Is configured to be less than the predetermined number of rounds.

  According to the gaming machine 5, an effect based on one effect information is reproduced by the reproducing means for one round in the special gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of effect information stored in the effect storing means is more special. It is configured to be less than a predetermined number of rounds performed in the gaming state. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information based on the effect information operated by the player and stored in the effect storage means can be displayed in the special game state.

  For example, if the dynamic display of the identification information based on the effect information operated by the player and stored in the effect storage means is not displayed in the special game state, the dynamic of the identification information when the operator operates In order to view the display or take a picture with a mobile phone terminal, the game must be continued until the next special game state is entered. Therefore, the player continues the game while expecting the transition to the next special gaming state, but the dynamic of the identification information multiple times (for example, hundreds of times) until the transition to the next special gaming state. Display may be performed. In other words, even if the player operates the operation means, it is unclear when the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation means is operated can be visually recognized or captured by the mobile phone terminal. May be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 5, all the dynamic display of the identification information based on the effect information operated by the player and stored in the effect storage means is displayed in the special game state. Therefore, since the dynamic display of the identification information when operated by the player is always reproduced in the special game state that first shifts after the operation of the operation means, the player's willingness to operate the operation means is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine 5, the reproduction means reproduces and displays an effect based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means in the first half of the rounds that are performed a predetermined number of times in the special gaming state. A gaming machine 6 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the reproduction means reproduces and displays the effect based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means in the first half of the rounds that are performed a predetermined number of times in the special gaming state. In the second round, the production based on the production information stored in the production storage means is not reproduced and displayed.

  Generally, the player has a sense of expectation in the gaming state after the special gaming state is finished. That is, the player continues the game in the special game state while expecting that the game state is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends. Therefore, in the special game state round, the player's interest in the game can be increased by performing a suggestion effect that suggests a game state to be transferred after the special game state is ended. In particular, the player is discouraged when there is a high possibility that the player will enter a gaming state that is not advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state, but if the suggestion effect is performed in the latter half round of the special gaming state, the player is advantageous. You can expect to move to a new gaming state. That is, when the suggestion effect is performed in the special game state, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game in the special game state by performing the latter half round.

  According to the gaming machine 6, since the stage based on the stage information stored in the stage storage means is not reproduced and displayed in the second half of the special gaming state, It is also possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests a gaming state that transitions after the gaming state ends. In other words, the player can expect to enter a gaming state advantageous to the player after the special gaming state is finished in the second half round of the special gaming state, so that the player operates in the first half round of the special gaming state. Expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in the second half round of the special gaming state while providing a gameability that allows visual recognition or shooting with a mobile phone terminal of the dynamic display of identification information when the means is operated It is possible to provide a game that can give a feeling.

  Any one of the gaming machines 3 to 6, further comprising a first memory deleting means for deleting the effect information stored in the effect storage means at the end of the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine 7, at the end of the special gaming state, the production information stored in the production storage means is deleted by the first memory deletion means, so when the transition to the next special gaming state is made, Reproduction of the dynamic display effect of the identification information displayed in the gaming state can be reliably prevented. Therefore, since the dynamic display effect of the identification information displayed in the previous special game state is not displayed in the current special game state, the dynamic display effect of the already-identified identification information is repeated. There is nothing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to repeated presentation of the dynamic display of the recognized identification information.

  Moreover, although the 1st memory | storage deletion means shall delete the effect information memorize | stored in an effect memory | storage means at the time of completion | finish of a special game state, dynamic of the identification information based on the effect information memorize | stored in an effect memory | storage means is carried out. The production information stored in the production storage means may be deleted between the time when the reproduction of the production of the display is completed and the end of the special game state. Even in this configuration, since the dynamic display of the recognized identification information is not repeated many times, it is possible to suppress discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine 2, when the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed on the display device is a predetermined period or longer, the gaming machine 2 includes a standby effect execution unit that performs a standby effect as one of the effects, The reproduction unit reproduces and displays the effect displayed on the display device when the operation unit is operated while the standby effect is being performed by the standby effect executing unit. A gaming machine 8 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 8, when the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed on the display device is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the standby effect is performed by the standby effect executing means as one of the effects. While the effect is being performed, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means. Accordingly, the player intentionally prevents the identification information from being dynamically displayed (for example, if the game is interrupted for a predetermined period), and is displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated. Since the effect (for example, the effect of dynamic display of identification information) is reproduced and displayed, the effect can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal according to the player's will.

  In the gaming machine 8, the effect storage means has an upper limit on the number of the effect information stored, and the reproduction means is stored in the effect storage means when the standby effect is performed. The gaming machine 9 is characterized in that effects corresponding to the number of effects information are reproduced and displayed at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine 9, the effect storage means has an upper limit on the number of pieces of effect information stored, and the reproduction means stores the effect information stored in the effect storage means when the standby effect is performed. Since the effects for several minutes are reproduced and displayed at predetermined intervals, the player can view all the effects when operating the operation means by continuing the state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not performed. You can shoot with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the gaming machine 8 or 9, a winning opening for a game medium, a detecting means for detecting a winning of the gaming medium to the winning opening, and the standby effect being performed, When the winning of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the standby effect is ended, and start means for starting dynamic display of the identification information, and dynamic display of the identification information is started by the start means. A gaming machine 10 comprising: a second memory deleting unit that deletes the effect information stored in the effect storage unit before the game is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 10, when the detection means detects the winning of the game medium at the winning opening, the stand-by effect is ended, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the starting means. Before the display is started, the production information stored in the production storage unit is deleted by the second storage deletion unit. Therefore, the dynamic display effect of the identification information displayed in the previous standby effect is not displayed in the current standby effect. Will not be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to repeated presentation of the dynamic display of the recognized identification information.

  The deletion of the production information by the second storage deletion unit may be performed when the standby production is finished and the dynamic display of the identification information is started, or in the production information stored in the production storage unit. You may perform when the display of reproduction of the production based on all ends. Even if the production information stored in the production storage means is deleted at any timing, the production information is not stored in the production storage means. It is not repeated and it can suppress giving an unpleasant feeling to a player.

  In any one of the gaming machines 2 to 10, a sub-control unit that is interposed between the main control unit and the display device and controls a plurality of effects displayed on the display device based on an instruction from the main control unit. The main control means transmits to the sub control means form information indicating a form of dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display device, and the sub control means , When the operation means is operated, the acquisition means for acquiring the progress information indicating the time elapsed from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the effect storage means is provided in the sub-control means, The gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the form information transmitted from the main control means and the progress information acquired by the acquisition means are stored as the effect information.

  According to the gaming machine 11, progress information indicating the elapsed time from the start of dynamic display of identification information when the operation means is operated is acquired by the acquisition means, and the progress information acquired by the acquisition means and the main control Information transmitted from the means to the sub-control means and indicating the dynamic display form of the identification information displayed on the display device is stored as effect information when the player operates the operation means Stored in the means. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store a large amount of information like image information for displaying a dynamic display of identification information on the screen of the display device, it is not necessary to provide a large storage capacity for the effect storage means, and the device cost. Can be reduced.

  Examples of the form information transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means include time information indicating the time when the identification information is dynamically displayed, stop information indicating the stop result of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the like. Is done. In this configuration, the sub-control means sets the dynamic display mode (for example, lose, reach, super reach, notice effect, etc.) from the time information, and displays the display device so that the display is performed in the set mode. To output instructions.

  In the gaming machine 11, based on the image storage means for storing image information for displaying the dynamic display of the identification information on the screen of the display device, and the image information stored in the image storage means, the identification A dynamic display unit that creates a screen unit image according to a change in the dynamic display of information, displays the created screen unit image continuously, and performs dynamic display; and the acquisition unit includes: The gaming machine 12 is characterized in that the number of images created per screen is acquired as the progress information.

  According to the gaming machine 12, the image information for displaying the dynamic display of the identification information on the screen of the display device is stored in the image storage means, and the identification is performed based on the image information stored in the image storage means. A screen unit image corresponding to a change in the dynamic display of information is created, and the created image unit image is continuously displayed by the dynamic display means for dynamic display. And since the acquisition means can acquire progress information by acquiring the number of images created for each screen that is created to dynamically display the identification information on the display device, the operation means is operated. The time when the dynamic display of the identification information at the time has elapsed can be accurately acquired.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the result of stopping the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the gaming machine 1 includes a transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, The effect storage means stores effect information corresponding to the effect in the special game state when the operation means is operated while the effect in the special game state is being performed on the display device. Characteristic gaming machine 13.

  According to the gaming machine 13, when the result of stopping the dynamic display of the identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information, the transition is made to the special game state that gives a game value advantageous to the player, and the special game When the operating means is operated while the state effect is being performed on the display device, effect information corresponding to the special game state effect displayed on the display device is stored in the effect storage means. Therefore, since the effects in the special game state can be reproduced and displayed later, if a rare effect is displayed in the special game state, the player can operate the operation means to display the rare effect later. Is done. Therefore, the player can surely see a rare performance, and can prepare a mobile phone terminal and take a picture with certainty.

  In addition, rare effects during the special gaming state are displayed according to the number of consecutive times when the special gaming state is entered again before the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times after the special gaming state ends (for example, in a short time). It may be displayed, or may be displayed in accordance with the number of consecutive times when the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, during probability change) after the special game state ends. In addition, a rare effect may be displayed according to the number of combinations of the number of transitions to the special gaming state during the short time and the continuous number of times during the probability change. According to these configurations, as the transition to the special gaming state continues, the possibility that a rare presentation will be displayed during the special gaming state increases, so the player's expectation that the special gaming state will continue is increased. In addition, it is possible to increase the willingness to view the rare effects or to take pictures with the mobile phone terminal.

  In the gaming machine 13, the reproduction means operates the special gaming state effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means. A gaming machine 14 which is reproduced and displayed during a special gaming state when the means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine 14, when the operation means is operated, the special gaming state effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means. It is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means during the special game state. Therefore, the effect of the player operating the operating means during the special game state can be reproduced and displayed during the special game state. Here, in a general gaming machine, the number of times of transition to the special gaming state is extremely small compared to the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information, so the player can operate the operation means until the transition to the next special gaming state. If the effect of the special gaming state when operated is not reproduced, the player's willingness to operate the operating means may be reduced. According to the gaming machine 14, since the effect of the player operating the operating means during the special gaming state can be reproduced and displayed during the special gaming state, the player's willingness to operate the operating means is prevented from being reduced. it can.

  In the gaming machine 13 or 14, the special game state is such that a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and the reproduction means uses one effect information for one round in the special game state. A game machine that reproduces and displays an effect based on it, and reproduces and displays an effect based on the effect information in the second half of the rounds performed a predetermined number of times. 15.

  According to the gaming machine 15, in the special gaming state, a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and an effect based on one effect information is reproduced for one round in the special game state. Is reproduced and displayed. The reproduction means reproduces and displays an effect based on one effect information in the second half of the rounds performed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, the reproduction of the production when the player operates the operation means during the special game state is reproduced in the second half round of the special game state, so a rare production etc. is displayed using the first half part of the special game state can do. If the production is reproduced in the first half of the special game state, the number of rounds that can be used for rare productions will be reduced, so the number of rare display modes (variations) that can be performed during the special game state will be reduced. There is a possibility that the gameability with respect to the special gaming state will be lowered. According to the gaming machine 15, since the first half of the rounds in the special gaming state can be used for rare effects, the number of rounds in which the rare effects can be performed during the special gaming state increases, and the game characteristics for the special gaming state effects are increased. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine 13 or 14, the special game state is such that a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and the reproduction means reproduces and displays the effect only in the last round of the special game state. A gaming machine 16 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine 16, in the special gaming state, a round in which a specific effect is performed is performed a predetermined number of times, and the effect is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means only in the final round of the special game state. The number of rounds that can be displayed increases. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects in the special game state, and can visually recognize the effects that are rare in the final round or shoot with the mobile phone terminal. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects of the special gaming state and to prevent the game characteristics from being lowered while providing the gameability that allows the player to visually recognize the effect when the operating means is operated or to shoot with the mobile phone terminal.

  In addition, for example, when a player shoots an effect on a mobile phone terminal, if the effect is reproduced in a plurality of rounds in the special gaming state, the player holds the mobile phone terminal during many rounds. It is necessary to concentrate on a game in a special game state. According to the gaming machine 16, since the effects when the player operates the operation means are displayed in a final round in the special gaming state, the player can be concentrated on the game in the special gaming state. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to visually recognize or reproduce the rendition effect with the mobile phone terminal.

  It should be noted that the upper limit of the effect information stored in the effect storage means may be one, and the reproduction of the effect based on the one effect information may be performed in the final round. In this configuration, the number of effects reproduced by the player's operation is reduced, but the upper limit is one that the effect can be reproduced by operating the operating means in the first round of the special gaming state. By suggesting that it will be reproduced in the final round, etc., it is possible to provide a gameability that allows selection of effects to be reproduced over multiple rounds, and to concentrate the player on games in a special gaming state Can do.

  In the gaming machine 15, when the operation means is operated, the game machine 15 includes acquisition means for acquiring progress information indicating a time elapsed from the start of the round, and the effect storage means is used as the effect information by the acquisition means. A gaming machine 17 that stores the acquired progress information and round information indicating a round when the operation means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine 17, when the operation means is operated, the progress information indicating the time elapsed since the start of the round is acquired by the acquisition means, and the acquired progress information and the operation means are operated. Round information indicating this round is stored in the effect storage means as effect information. Therefore, there is no need to store a large amount of information like the image information for displaying the effects of each round in the special gaming state on the screen of the display device, so there is no need to provide a large storage capacity for the effect storage means. The cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 17, on the basis of the image storage means for storing image information for displaying the effect of the special gaming state on the screen of the display device, and the image information stored in the image storage means. A screen display unit configured to create a screen unit image according to a change in the production, and display the created screen unit image continuously to perform the round production unit, and the acquisition unit includes the screen unit image. A gaming machine 18 characterized in that the number of created images is acquired as the progress information.

  According to the gaming machine 18, the image information for displaying the special gaming state effect on the screen of the display device is stored in the image storage means, and the special game is based on the image information stored in the image storage means. A screen unit image corresponding to a change in the state round effect is created, and the created image unit image is continuously displayed by the round display means to perform the round effect. And since the acquisition means can acquire progress information by acquiring the number of images created for each screen that is created in order to produce a round effect on the display device, the acquisition means at the time when the operation means is operated. The time when the round performance has passed can be acquired accurately.

  In any one of the gaming machines 16 to 18, the game machine includes an information number storage means for storing the number of effect information stored in the effect storage means, and the reproduction means stores the effect information stored in the information number storage means. When the number is singular, the effect is reproduced and displayed in the final round of the special gaming state, and when the number of pieces of effect information stored in the information number storage means is plural, According to the number of pieces of effect information stored in the information number storage means, the game includes the final round and reproduces and displays the effect in a round that is continuous before the final round. Machine 19.

  According to the gaming machine 19, when the number of pieces of production information stored in the production storage means is stored in the information number storage means, and the number of pieces of production information stored in the information number storage means is singular, If the replay means reproduces and displays the effects in the last round of the special gaming state, and the number of pieces of effect information stored in the information number storage means includes a final round according to the number of the effect information The effect is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means in rounds that are continued before the final round. Therefore, the reproduction of the production by the reproduction means is performed in the last round among the rounds in the special gaming state or in the latter half of the rounds including the final round, so it is possible to display rare presentations in all the rounds in the special gaming state Increase the number of rounds. In other words, the player can view the rare effects that are reproduced in the last round or subsequent rounds including the final round or shoot with the mobile phone terminal while visually recognizing the effects in the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which an effect when the player operates the operation means can be visually recognized or photographed with a mobile phone terminal while suppressing a decrease in the game property with respect to the effect in the special game state.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 19, the operation unit is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit. And a stop means for stopping and displaying the reproduced display.

  According to the gaming machine 20, when the operation means is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation means is operated by the reproduction means, the reproduced display is displayed. Is stopped and displayed by the stopping means. Therefore, the player can operate the operation means while the effect is being reproduced by the reproduction means, so that the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, or can be viewed or photographed with the mobile phone terminal. Accordingly, among the effects that are reproduced, the display mode desired by the player to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal can be stopped and displayed, so the display mode desired by the player can be viewed or shot with the mobile phone terminal. Possible playability can be provided.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 19, the operation unit is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit. And a first reproduction return unit that reproduces and displays the effect displayed on the display device when the operation unit is operated from the beginning by the reproduction unit. Machine 21.

  According to the gaming machine 21, when the operation means is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation means is operated by the reproduction means, the first reproduction return means Thus, when the operation means is operated, the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed again from the beginning by the reproduction means. Therefore, the player can reproduce the effect that he / she wants to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal again from the beginning by operating the operation means while the effect is reproduced by the reproduction means. Therefore, even if the player misses an effect that he or she wants to view or take a picture with a mobile phone terminal, by operating the operation means, it is possible to provide a game that gives an opportunity to view or take a picture again with the mobile phone terminal. .

  In the gaming machine 20, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, an adjustment unit that moves the elapsed time back and forth with reference to the elapsed time of the reproduction effect that is stopped and displayed, A gaming machine (22), comprising: a forward / backward stop display means for causing the display device to stop and display an effect according to the elapsed time changed by the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine 22, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, the elapsed time based on the elapsed time of the stop-displayed effect is changed by the adjustment unit, and the time is changed. An effect corresponding to the elapsed time is displayed on the display device by the front and rear display means. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means to stop and display the effect that is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means, for example, the player's operation is delayed so that the player can view or take a picture with the mobile phone terminal. Even if the desired display is not stopped, it is possible to adjust the display to be stopped by adjusting the elapsed time by the adjusting means, so that the player can visually check the desired display or can take a picture with a mobile phone terminal. Can be provided.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 22, when the operation unit is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, the reproduction of the effect is resumed by the reproduction unit when the operation unit is operated. A gaming machine 23 comprising a restarting means for causing the game machine 23 to restart.

  According to the gaming machine 23, when the operation means is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the reproduction means reproduces the effect from the display at the time when the stop display is performed by the resumption means. Since the display is resumed, even if there are a plurality of displays that the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal during the reproduction of one, the player can operate the operation means a plurality of times to operate the desired multiple Can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gameability in which a plurality of displays desired by the player can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 22, when the operation unit is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, an effect including the stopped display is first displayed by the reproduction unit. A game machine 24, comprising second reproduction returning means for reproducing and displaying the data again.

  According to the gaming machine 24, when the operation means is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the second reproduction return means displays on the display device when the operation means is operated. The effect that has been performed is reproduced and displayed again from the beginning by the reproduction means. Therefore, even if the operation means is operated and the effect is stopped and displayed while the reproduction means is being reproduced, the operation of the operation means is delayed, and the effect desired by the player cannot be stopped and displayed. By operating the operating means, it is possible to provide a game that gives an opportunity to stop and display the desired display again.

  In any of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the operation of the operation unit is effective while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit. A gaming machine 25 comprising a suggestion means for suggesting that there is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine 25, the suggestion means suggests that the operation of the operation means is effective while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation means is operated by the reproduction means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reproduced performance can be stopped or reproduced again from the beginning.

  In particular, since the operation means is operated when the player wants to reproduce an effect that the player wants to visually recognize or shoot with the mobile phone terminal later, the player recognizes that the operation means can be operated during the reproduction of the effect. Although it becomes painful, it can be suggested that the operating means can be operated by the suggesting means, which is effective for improving game playability.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 25, the reproduction means is based on the operation of the operation means when the production information is stored in the production storage means, and before the reference and for a certain period from the reference. The gaming machine 26 is characterized in that an effect during a period corresponding to is reproduced and displayed based on effect information stored in the effect storage means.

  According to the gaming machine 26, the reproduction means is based on the operation information when the production information is stored in the production storage means based on the production information stored in the production storage means. Since the effect of the period before the reference and a certain period of time elapses is reproduced and displayed, the effect is given before the time when the player operates the operation means (dynamic display of identification information, special game state effect, etc.) Can be reproduced.

  For example, even if a player tries to operate the operation means for later viewing or shooting with a mobile phone terminal for a rare presentation performed on a display device, the player will find that the rare presentation ends in a short time. Even if the operating means is operated in a hurry, there is a possibility that the rare performance has already ended. Therefore, when the effect from the operation start time of the operation means is reproduced by the reproduction means, the effect that the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal may not be reproduced.

  According to the gaming machine 26, the reproduction means can reproduce the effect from before the time when the player operated the operation means, so that the rare effect is performed in a short time and the operation of the player's operation means is not in time. But that rare production can be reproduced later. Therefore, the player can visually recognize or photograph a rare effect when the operation means is operated with the mobile phone terminal.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 25, the reproduction means stores an effect during a period in which the operation means has been operated when the effect information is stored in the effect storage means, in the effect storage means. A gaming machine 27 that is reproduced and displayed based on information.

  According to the gaming machine 27, the reproduction means reproduces the effect during the period in which the operation means was operated when the effect information was stored in the effect storage means, based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means. Of the effects performed on the display device when the operating means is operated, the effects corresponding to the part operated by the player can be reproduced and displayed later. Therefore, since it is possible to reproduce and display the effect of only the part operated by the player considering that it is necessary, it is possible to prevent the effect that the player considers unnecessary from being displayed later.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 27 includes auxiliary effect means for performing an auxiliary effect corresponding to the effect performed on the display device, and the reproduction means also reproduces the effect of the auxiliary effect means. A gaming machine 28.

  According to the gaming machine 28, the reproduction means also reproduces the effect of the auxiliary effect means that performs the auxiliary effect according to the effect performed on the display device, so that the overall effect when the player operates the operation means is later displayed. It can be taken by visual recognition or by a mobile phone terminal.

  In addition, as an auxiliary effect means, a lamp that operates in conjunction with a dynamic display of identification information and a special game state effect, a lamp that lights up in conjunction with a dynamic display of identification information and a special game state effect, Examples include a speaker that outputs sound in conjunction with dynamic display of identification information and effects of a special gaming state.

  Any of the gaming machines 1 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  The gaming machine 30 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, identification information (for example, a symbol) is dynamically displayed on a screen of a display device having a liquid crystal screen or the like, and when the dynamic display is stopped, the identification information has a predetermined combination (for example, “7”). There are known gaming machines (such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) that shift to a special gaming state (for example, jackpot) that gives an advantageous gaming value to a player when the symbols are stopped in a line.
The player expects that the dynamic display of the identification information that is normally performed stops and displays a special game state with a combination of the predetermined identification information, so that the game is performed while paying attention to the dynamic display of the identification information. I do. However, since the transition to the special game state is extremely small with respect to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed, the game is repeated many times if there is no variation in the dynamic display of the identification information during normal times. The player gets bored with the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, a player who has played a game many times is less likely to pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification information, resulting in a problem that the gameability is reduced.
Therefore, in recent gaming machines, at the start of dynamic display of identification information, a rare suggestion effect (such as a premier effect) that gives the expectation of the transition to a special game state thereafter, or dynamic display of identification information In the middle of the game, a rare performance different from normal is performed, and the player is bored with the dynamic display of the identification information, and it is suppressed that the gameability is reduced (Patent Document 1: JP 2000-342784 A).
In addition, if there is no variation in the production during the special gaming state, a player who has played the game many times can have expectation for the addition of game value, but the production for the special gaming state You can't have a sense of expectation. As a result, gazing at the effects in the special gaming state is reduced, and the gameability in the special gaming state is reduced. Accordingly, there is a gaming machine that performs rare effects during a special gaming state according to the number of consecutive consecutive special gaming states (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots including probability changes and time savings).
As described above, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a rare effect at the start or during the dynamic display of identification information, so that the player gets bored with the dynamic display of identification information. However, since the display mode of the identification information dynamically changes as the dynamic display progresses, the rare display displayed to suppress the decrease in game play There was a case that I missed. Similarly, since the display mode of the effects in the special game state changes from time to time, even if rare effects are performed, the rare effects may be missed.
In recent years, a mobile phone terminal has been provided with a photo function, and it is often performed to take a rare effect using the photo function and then show the taken effect to an acquaintance. However, the dynamic display of the identification information and the special gaming state effect change as the display progresses as needed, so even if a rare effect is performed, it is rare while preparing a mobile phone terminal. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to leave as a photograph.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can surely see or shoot rare effects performed on a display device. Yes.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a main control unit that performs main control of the game, and a display device that displays a plurality of effects based on instructions of the main control unit, As one of the effects, dynamic display of identification information is performed on the display device. The operation means operated by the player and the operation means are operated while the effect is being performed on the display device. Then, when the operation means is operated based on the effect storage means for storing the effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device and the effect information stored in the effect storage means, Reproduction means for reproducing and displaying the effect displayed on the display device during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information is provided.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1, in which the operation means is operated in the effect storage means while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. The effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information in the case is stored.
In the gaming machine of technical idea 3, in the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit is reproduced and displayed. In the meantime, there is provided stop means for stopping and displaying the reproduced display when the operation means is operated.
In the gaming machine of the technical idea 4, in the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stopping unit, the elapsed time of the reproduction that is being displayed and stopped is displayed. As a reference, there are provided adjusting means for moving the elapsed time back and forth, and front and back stop display means for causing the display device to stop-display an effect corresponding to the elapsed time changed by the adjusting means.
In the gaming machine of technical idea 5, in the gaming machine of technical idea 3 or 4, when the operation unit is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stop unit, the stop display Resumption means for causing the reproduction means to resume reproduction of the effect from the point in time when the reproduction is performed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, when the operation means is operated by the player while the presentation is being performed on the display device, the presentation information corresponding to the presentation displayed on the display device is produced. The effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced by the reproduction means during the effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information based on the stored effect information stored in the storage means. Is displayed. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed on the display device, the player can operate the operation means to display the rare effect later, so that the player can surely see the rare effect. There is an effect that it is possible to shoot with certainty because there is room for preparing a mobile phone terminal.
Also, here, if the effect displayed on the display device when the player operates the operating means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the reproduced effect is It is unclear whether it is an effect for the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, since the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means at the time other than the dynamic display of the identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the reliability of the dynamic display of the identification information from being lowered.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the operating means is operated by the player while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. And the effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is stored in the effect storage means, so that the effect displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information is an effect other than the dynamic display of the identification information. Sometimes it can be reproduced and displayed by reproduction means. Therefore, since the player can operate the operation means, the dynamic display effect of the identification information when the operation means is operated can be reproduced later, so that the player has a desire to view or photograph the player. It can be displayed later. Therefore, when a rare effect is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player operates the operation means, and the rare effect is displayed later. There is an effect that the production can be surely visually recognized, and there is a room for preparing a mobile phone terminal, so that it can be surely photographed.
Further, here, if the effect of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means is reproduced and displayed during the dynamic display of the other identification information, the dynamic information of the current identification information is displayed. It is unclear whether it is an effect on display or an effect of dynamic display of identification information when the player operates the operating means. As a result, the reliability of the dynamic display of identification information is reduced. According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 2, since the effect displayed on the display device when the operating means is operated is reproduced and displayed by the reproducing means at the time other than the dynamic display of the identification information, Whether the presentation of the dynamic display of the identification information is the production for the dynamic display of the identification information this time or the presentation of the dynamic display of the identification information when the player operates the operation means, There is an effect that the reliability of the dynamic display of the identification information can be prevented from being lowered.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 or 2, the effect displayed on the display device when the operating unit is operated by the reproducing unit is reproduced and displayed. If the operation means is operated while the display is being performed, the reproduced display is stopped and displayed by the stop means. Therefore, the player can operate the operation means while the effect is being reproduced by the reproduction means, so that the reproduced effect is stopped and displayed, or can be viewed or photographed with the mobile phone terminal. Accordingly, among the effects that are reproduced, the display mode desired by the player to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal can be stopped and displayed, so the display mode desired by the player can be viewed or shot with the mobile phone terminal. There is an effect of providing possible playability.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, when the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stopping unit, the elapsed time of the effect displayed and stopped. The elapsed time based on the above is changed by the adjusting means, and an effect corresponding to the elapsed time changed before and after is displayed on the display device by the front and rear display means. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means to stop and display the effect that is reproduced and displayed by the reproduction means, for example, the player's operation is delayed so that the player can view or take a picture with the mobile phone terminal. Even if the desired display is not stopped, it is possible to adjust the display to be stopped by adjusting the elapsed time by the adjusting means, so that the player can visually check the desired display or can take a picture with a mobile phone terminal. There is an effect that it can be provided.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the technical idea 3 or 4, when the operation unit is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction unit is stopped and displayed by the stopping unit, Since the reproduction means restarts the reproduction of the effect from the display at the time of the stop display by the restarting means, there are a plurality of displays during the reproduction in which the player desires to view or shoot with the mobile phone terminal is 1 Even in this case, the player can stop and display a plurality of desired effects by operating the operation means a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gameability in which a plurality of displays desired by the player can be viewed or photographed with a mobile phone terminal.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
23 Symbol save button (operation means )
8 1 3rd symbol display device (display device)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (sub control means)
114 Display control device (sub control means )
2 33h Image storage area ( effect storage means)
233j reproduction stop flag (part of stop means)
S205 part of the transition means
Some of S 3308～S3312 reproducer S3310: Yes part of stop means
S 4602, S 4605 Part of adjusting means S5002 Part of obtaining means (elapsed time in special gaming state)

Claims (5)

A main control means for performing main control of the game, and a display device for displaying a plurality of effects based on instructions from the main control means, and dynamic display of identification information as one of the effects is performed on the display device. In the gaming machine to be performed,
Operation means operated by a player;
When the operation means is operated while an effect is being performed on the display device, an effect storage means for storing effect information corresponding to the effect displayed on the display device;
Based on the effect information stored in the effect storage means, the effect displayed on the display device when the operation means is operated is reproduced and displayed during effects other than the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine comprising a reproduction means.   The effect storage means stores the effect information corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information when the operation means is operated while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display device. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   When the operation unit is operated while the effect displayed on the display device is reproduced and displayed when the operation unit is operated by the reproduction unit, the reproduced display is stopped. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising stop means for displaying. When the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the adjustment means for moving the elapsed time back and forth with reference to the elapsed time of the production being reproduced that has been stopped and displayed,
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising front / rear stop display means for causing the display device to stop and display an effect according to the elapsed time changed by the adjusting means.   When the operation means is operated after the reproduction display by the reproduction means is stopped and displayed by the stop means, the reproduction means restarts the reproduction of the effect from the time when the display is stopped. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that.

Images